DCY

6230, 6330 and 6430

Tractors
*OMAL179798*

OPERATOR'S MANUAL
6230, 6330, and 6430 Tractors
OMAL179798 ISSUE A2 (ENGLISH)

CALIFORNIA
Proposition 65 Warning

Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents

are known to the State of California to cause cancer,
birth defects, and other reproductive harm.

If this product contains a gasoline engine:

WARNING

The engine exhaust from this product contains

chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm.

The State of California requires the above two warnings.

OMAL179798

Additional Proposition 65 Warnings can be found in this manual.

John Deere Werke Mannheim

(This manual replaces OMAL179798 J0)
North American Edition
LITHO IN U.S.A.
 Introduction
Foreword
READ THIS MANUAL carefully to learn how to operate BEFORE DELIVERING THIS MACHINE, your dealer
and service your machine correctly. Failure to do so performed a predelivery inspection. After operating for
could result in personal injury or equipment damage. This the first 100 hours, schedule an after-sale inspection with
manual and the safety signs on your machine may also your dealer to ensure best performance.
be available in other languages (see your John Deere
dealer to order). THIS TRACTOR IS DESIGNED SOLELY for use in
customary agricultural or similar operations (”INTENDED
THIS MANUAL SHOULD BE CONSIDERED a permanent USE”). Use in any other way is considered as contrary to
part of your machine and should remain with the machine the intended use. The manufacturer accepts no liability
when you sell it. for damage or injury resulting from this misuse, and these
MEASUREMENTS IN THIS MANUAL are given in both risks must be borne solely by the user. Compliance
metric and customary U.S. unit equivalents. Use only with and strict adherence to the conditions of operation,
correct replacement parts and fasteners. Metric and inch service and repair as specified by the manufacturer also
fasteners may require a specific metric or inch wrench. constitute essential elements for the intended use.

RIGHT-HAND AND LEFT-HAND sides are determined by THIS TRACTOR SHOULD BE OPERATED, serviced and
facing the direction of forward travel. repaired only by persons familiar with all its particular
characteristics and acquainted with the relevant safety
WRITE PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS (P.I.N.) rules (accident prevention). The accident prevention
in the ”Serial Numbers” section. Accurately record all regulations, all other generally recognized regulations
the numbers to help in tracing the machine should it be on safety and occupational medicine and the road traffic
stolen. Your dealer also needs these numbers when you regulations must be observed at all times. Any arbitrary
order parts. File the identification numbers in a secure modifications carried out on this tractor will relieve the
place off the machine. manufacturer of all liability for any resulting damage or
injury.
SETTING FUEL DELIVERY BEYOND PUBLISHED
factory specifications or otherwise overpowering will result
in loss of warranty protection for this machine.
OU12401,00013C4 -19-25MAR06-1/1

021412

PN=2
 Contents
Page Page

Identification Views Service Accumulator Systems Safely...............05-19

Identification Views.............................................00-1 Service Tires Safely..........................................05-19
Service Front-Wheel Drive Tractor Safely ........05-19
Tightening Wheel Retaining Bolts/Nuts ............05-20
Safety Avoid High-Pressure Fluids ..............................05-20
Recognize Safety Information ............................05-1 Do Not Open High-Pressure Fuel System........05-20
Understand Signal Words...................................05-1 Store Attachments Safely .................................05-21
Follow Safety Instructions...................................05-1 Dispose of Waste Properly ...............................05-21
Prepare for Emergencies....................................05-2
Wear Protective Clothing....................................05-2
Protect Against Noise .........................................05-2 Safety Decals
Handle Fuel Safely—Avoid Fires........................05-3 Prevent Machine Runaway.................................10-1
Handle Starting Fluid Safely ...............................05-3 Use Seat Belt......................................................10-1
Fire Prevention ...................................................05-3 Operate the Tractor Safely .................................10-2
Keep ROPS Installed Properly ...........................05-4 Do Not Modify “ROPS” .......................................10-3
Use Foldable ROPS and Seat Belt Properly ......05-4 Tow Loads Safely ...............................................10-3
Stay Clear of Rotating Drivelines........................05-5 Use of Instructional Seat ....................................10-4
Use Steps and Handholds Correctly ..................05-5 Stay Clear of PTO ..............................................10-4
Read Operator Manuals for ISOBUS Regular ROPS Position ......................................10-5
Implements.....................................................05-5 Never Carry Riders.............................................10-5
Use Seat Belt Properly .......................................05-6 Caution with Front Loader Operation .................10-6
Operating the Tractor Safely ..............................05-7 Caution with Front Loader Operation .................10-6
Avoid Backover Accidents ..................................05-8
Limited Use in Forestry Operation......................05-8 Controls and Instruments
Operating the Loader Tractor Safely ..................05-8 Vehicle Controls..................................................15-1
Keep Riders Off Machine ...................................05-9 PTO and Creeper Controls.................................15-2
Instructional Seat................................................05-9 Attachment Controls ...........................................15-2
Use Safety Lights and Devices...........................05-9 Heater and Air-Conditioning Controls.................15-2
Use a Safety Chain...........................................05-10 Indicator Lights and Displays..............................15-3
Transport Towed Equipment at Safe Speeds ...05-10 Software Update.................................................15-5
Use Caution On Slopes and Uneven Terrain.... 05-11
Freeing a Mired Machine.................................. 05-11 Lights
Avoid Contact with Agricultural Chemicals .......05-12 Light Switches (Tractors with Cab).....................20-1
Handle Agricultural Chemicals Safely ..............05-13 Worklight Switches (Tractors with Cab)..............20-1
Handling Batteries Safely .................................05-14 Light Switches (Tractors without Cab)................20-2
Avoid Heating Near Pressurized Fluid Lines ....05-14 Worklight Switches (Tractors without Cab).........20-2
Remove Paint Before Welding or Heating........05-15 Additional Headlights (Optional Equipment).......20-3
Welding Near Electronic Control Units .............05-15 Beacon Light (Optional Equipment)....................20-3
Handle Electronic Components and Lights ..................................................................20-4
Brackets Safely ............................................05-15 Use Safety Lights and Devices...........................20-5
Practice Safe Maintenance...............................05-16 Operate the Hazard Warning Light Switch .........20-5
Avoid Hot Exhaust ............................................05-16 Switches for Turn Signal Lights and
Work In Ventilated Area....................................05-17 Horn (Tractors with Cab) ................................20-6
Support Machine Properly ................................05-17 Switches for Turn Signal Lights and
Prevent Machine Runaway...............................05-17 Horn (Tractors without Cab) ...........................20-6
Park Machine Safely.........................................05-18 Seven-Terminal Trailer Socket ...........................20-7
Transport Tractor Safely ...................................05-18
Service Cooling System Safely ........................05-18

Continued on next page

Original Instructions. All information, illustrations and specifications in this

manual are based on the latest information available at the time of publication.
The right is reserved to make changes at any time without notice.
COPYRIGHT © 2012
DEERE & COMPANY
European Office Mannheim
All rights reserved.
A John Deere ILLUSTRUCTION ® Manual
Previous Editions
Copyright © 2010, 2009, 2008, 2007

i 021412

PN=1
 Contents

Page Page

Travel Speeds, SyncroPlus

Open Operator's Station and Cab Transmission (12/4)........................................45-4
Roll-Over Protective Structure (ROPS) ..............25-1 Travel Speeds, PowrReverser
Operate the Foldable ROPS...............................25-1 Transmission (16/16)......................................45-5
Seat Belt .............................................................25-1 Shift SyncroPlus™ Transmission /
Avoid Contact with Agricultural Chemicals .........25-2 PowrReverser Transmission ..........................45-6
Clean Vehicle of Hazardous Pesticides..............25-2 Travel Speeds, PowrQuad
Comfort Seat ......................................................25-3 Transmission (16/16)......................................45-8
Air Comfort Seat .................................................25-4 Travel Speeds, PowrQuad
Instructional Seat................................................25-4 Transmission (24/24)....................................45-10
Open Windows ...................................................25-6 Shift the PowrQuad Transmission .................... 45-11
Wiper and Washer System.................................25-7 Shift the PowrQuad Plus Transmission ............45-12
Fan and Air Louvers ...........................................25-8 Engage the Creeper Transmission...................45-13
Heating System ..................................................25-8 Engage the Front-Wheel Drive .........................45-13
Air Conditioning System .....................................25-9 Engage the Differential Lock ............................45-14
Tips On Using the Air-Conditioning System .......25-9 Hydraulic Foot Brakes ......................................45-14
Dome Light .......................................................25-10
Adjust Steering Wheel ......................................25-10 Hitch
Back-Up Alarm (Optional Equipment) ..............25-10 Hitch Control.......................................................50-1
Adjusting the Height of Access Step ................ 25-11 Hitch Remote Control .........................................50-2
Installing the Monitor ........................................ 25-11 Lift Limit ..............................................................50-2
Electrical Sockets (If Equipped)........................25-12 Transporting Mounted Implements.....................50-2
Multiple Power-Outlet Socket Strip (If Hitch Dampening ................................................50-3
Equipped).....................................................25-13 Adjust Rate of Implement Drop ..........................50-3
Service ADVISOR™ Socket.............................25-14 Depth Adjustment ...............................................50-3
Roof Hatch........................................................25-15 Load/Depth Adjustment ......................................50-4
1 Depth Control ..................................................50-4
Break-in Period 2-4 Mixed Control ...............................................50-5
After the First 4 and 8 Hours of Operation..........30-1 5 Load Control ....................................................50-5
Within the First 100 Hours of Operation .............30-2 Float position ......................................................50-6
After the First 100 Hours of Operation................30-2 Direct Actuation ..................................................50-6
Three-Point Hitch................................................50-6
Telescopic Draft Links.........................................50-7
Prestarting Checks Quick-Coupling (Hook-Type) Draft Links ............50-7
Prestarting Checks .............................................35-1
Attach Three-Point Hitch Mounted and
Comply with Operator's Manuals of
Drawn Implements .......................................50-10
Implement Manufacturers ..............................35-2
Leveling the Implement ....................................50-10
Center Link .......................................................50-10
Operating the Engine Quick-Coupling (Hook-Type) Center Link......... 50-11
Engine Fuel System and Power Rating..............40-1 Center Link Positions........................................ 50-11
Important Information Regarding the Engine......40-1 Lift Links ...........................................................50-12
Positions of Main (Key) Switch ...........................40-1 Adjust for Vertical Float.....................................50-13
Starting the Engine .............................................40-2 Sway Blocks (If Equipped)................................50-13
Cold-Weather Starting Aid..................................40-2 Stabilizing System (If Equipped).......................50-14
Starting with a Booster Battery ...........................40-3 Adjusting Spreading Dimension .......................50-14
Fuel Preheater....................................................40-3
Coolant Preheater ..............................................40-3
Power Take-Off
Engines with Turbocharger.................................40-3
PTO Guard .........................................................55-1
Engine Protection ...............................................40-4
Operating Instructions ........................................55-1
Towing the Tractor ..............................................40-4
PTO Options.......................................................55-1
Parking the Tractor .............................................40-4
PTO Speeds .......................................................55-2
Stopping the Engine ...........................................40-5
PTO Operation ...................................................55-2
Reversing Rear PTO Shafts ...............................55-3
Operating the Tractor Attach PTO-Driven Equipment ...........................55-4
Reduce Fuel Consumption .................................45-1
Select Correct Ground Travel Speed .................45-3
Ballast
Travel Speed Tables...........................................45-3
Selecting Ballast .................................................60-1
Changing Tires ...................................................45-3
Ballasting Rear Wheels ......................................60-1

Continued on next page

ii 021412

PN=2
 Contents

Page Page

Measuring Rear Wheel Slip................................60-1 Multi-Function Lever (Mechanical) .....................70-3

Installing Weights on Flanged Axle ....................60-2 Mechanical Multi-Function Lever with
Installing Weights on Rack-and-Pinion Axle.......60-2 Front-Loader Dampening ...............................70-4
Filling Tires with Liquid Ballast ...........................60-3 Rate of Cylinder Operation .................................70-5
Draining the Tires ...............................................60-3 Couplers .............................................................70-5
Installing Front Weights ......................................60-3 Hose Unions .......................................................70-5
Maximum Permissible Oil Withdrawal ................70-6
Wheel Tread, Tires Oil Withdrawal with Hydraulic Motor...................70-6
Use of Dual Wheels (easy-to-attach)..................65-1 Instructions on Operating a Hydraulic Motor ......70-6
Adjustable Front Axle (Tractors without Pressure-Free Return Circuit..............................70-7
Front-Wheel Drive).........................................65-1 Drawbar ..............................................................70-8
Adjust Front Axle ................................................65-1 Proper Use of Drawbar.......................................70-8
Change Wheels Safely .......................................65-4 Lengthwise Adjustment of Drawbar....................70-8
Check Toe-In ......................................................65-5 Use Safety Chain................................................70-9
Adjust Toe-In (Tractors without Vandalism Protection........................................70-10
Front-Wheel Drive Axle).................................65-6 Front Loader Installation - Front Loader
Adjust Toe-In (Tractors with Brackets ....................................................... 70-11
Front-Wheel Drive Axle).................................65-6
Front Wheel Tread Adjustment Transport
(Tractors With Front Wheel Drive)..................65-7 Transporting the Tractor .....................................75-1
Adjusting Front Wheel Tread with Towing the Tractor ..............................................75-1
Reversible Wheel Rims..................................65-7 Driving on Public Roads .....................................75-1
Tread Adjustment with Adjustable Rims.............65-8
Tighten Wheel Nuts ............................................65-9 Fuel, Lubricants, Hydraulic Oil and Coolant
Adjusting the Fixed Fenders...............................65-9 Diesel Fuel..........................................................80-1
Adjusting the Pivoting Fenders......................... 65-11 Lubricity of Diesel Fuel .......................................80-1
Rear Wheel Tread Adjustment with Handling and Storing Diesel Fuel .......................80-2
Flanged Axle ................................................65-12 Biodiesel Fuel .....................................................80-3
Positions of Rims and Wheel Disks Diesel Engine Break-In Oil .................................80-4
with Flanged Axle.........................................65-13 Diesel Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals ....80-5
Tread Widths, Flanged Axle .............................65-13 Transmission and Hydraulic Oil..........................80-6
Rear Wheel Tread Adjustment with Front-Wheel Drive Axle Oil .................................80-7
Rack-and-Pinion Axle...................................65-14 Grease................................................................80-8
Positions of Rims and Wheel Disks Mixing of Lubricants............................................80-8
with Rack-and-Pinion Axle ...........................65-15 Alternative and Synthetic Lubricants ..................80-8
Tread Widths, Rack-and-Pinion Axle................65-16 Lubricant Storage ...............................................80-9
Service Tires Safely..........................................65-17 Oil Filters ............................................................80-9
Tire Pressures, General ...................................65-17 Heavy Duty Diesel Engine Coolant ....................80-9
Ascertain the Correct Tire Pressure .................65-18 John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Coolant
Tire Pressure (for 30 km/h; 18.5 mph) Extender.......................................................80-10
— Front Tires on Tractors without Operating in Warm Temperature Climates .......80-10
Front-Wheel Drive ........................................65-18 Drain Intervals for Diesel Engine Coolant.........80-10
Tire Pressure (for 40 km/h; 25 mph) Additional Information About Diesel
— Front Tires on Tractors with Engine Coolants and John Deere
Front-Wheel Drive ........................................65-19 LIQUID COOLANT CONDITIONER............. 80-11
Tire Pressure (for 40 km/h; 25 mph) — Testing Diesel Engine Coolant..........................80-12
Rear Wheels ................................................65-20 Oilscan™ and CoolScan™...............................80-13
Tire Combinations (Tractors with
Front-Wheel Drive).......................................65-21
Check the Oil Sight-Glass (when the Lubrication and Periodic Service
Tire Combination has been Changed) .........65-22 Using High Pressure Washers ...........................85-1
Service Intervals .................................................85-1
Safe Maintenance and Cleaning ........................85-2
Additional Equipment General Instructions Regarding the
Selective Control Valves.....................................70-1 Condition of the Tractor..................................85-2
Adjustment of Pressure Limit at Open the Hood ...................................................85-2
Selective Control Valves (350 Series) ............70-1 Access to Battery................................................85-3
Levers for Mechanical Selective Access to Fuses .................................................85-3
Control Valves ................................................70-2 Jack Up the Tractor - Lifting Points ....................85-4

Continued on next page

iii 021412

PN=3
 Contents

Page Page

Important Instructions Regarding Alternator.......85-6

Note Regarding the Service Interval for Service / Every 1500 Hours or 2 Years
Engine Coolant...............................................85-6 Changing Oil in Front-Wheel Drive
After the First 100 Hours ....................................85-6 Axle and Final Drives ................................... 115-1
Service As Required...........................................85-7 Change Oil In Front-Wheel Drive Axle
Check/Replace Hydraulic Hoses ........................85-7 Housing ........................................................ 115-1
Periodic Service..................................................85-7 Change Oil in Front-Wheel Drive Final Drives .. 115-2
Other Service Jobs .............................................85-7 Change Transmission/Hydraulic Oil ................. 115-2
Service (Daily / Every 10, Every 250,
Every 500, Every 750 Hours) .........................85-8 Service / Every 6000 Hours
Service (Annually, Every 1000, Every Note Regarding the Service Interval for
1500 Hours) ...................................................85-9 Engine Coolant.............................................120-1
Service (Every 2000, Every 6000 Hours) ...........85-9 Change the Coolant..........................................120-2

Service / Daily or Every 10 Hours Service / As Required

Checking the Engine Oil Level ...........................90-1 Engine Air Cleaner ...........................................125-1
Checking the Fuel Filter......................................90-1 Cleaning the Primary Filter Element.................125-1
Checking on Lights .............................................90-2 Cleaning a Dusty Element ................................125-1
Other Service Jobs .............................................90-2 Secondary (Safety) Element.............................125-2
Installation ........................................................125-2
Service / Every 250 Hours Clean Cab Air Filters ........................................125-2
Servicing the Fuel Tank ......................................95-1 Clean Radiator and Condenser (if equipped) ...125-3
Check Transmission/Hydraulic System Check Coolant Level ........................................125-5
Oil Level .........................................................95-1 Checking the Fuel Filter....................................125-5
Prevent Battery Explosions ................................95-1 Bleeding Air from the Fuel System ...................125-5
Checking Electrolyte Level of Battery.................95-2 Lubricate All Lubricating Points ........................125-6
Lubricating Front Axle and Wheels Operator's Seat ................................................125-6
(Tractors without Front-Wheel Drive) .............95-2 Prevent Battery Explosions ..............................125-6
Lubricate Front Axle and U.J. Shafts Battery - Checking Specific Gravity ..................125-6
(Tractors with Front-Wheel Drive) ..................95-3 Starter Motor.....................................................125-6
Check Oil Level in MFWD Axle Housing ............95-3 Fuses and Relays in the Engine
Check Oil Level in MFWD Final Drives ..............95-4 Compartment ...............................................125-7
Checking Brake Operation .................................95-4 Fuses and Relays (Engine Compartment) .......125-7
Lubricating the Three-Point Hitch .......................95-4 Fuses F01PLB (Engine Compartment) ............125-8
Lubricate the Pivoting Fenders...........................95-5 Fuses F02PLB (Engine Compartment) ............125-8
Check the Neutral Start Circuit ...........................95-5 Relays K01PLB to K03PLB (Engine
Tighten Wheel Retaining Bolts/Nuts...................95-7 Compartment) ..............................................125-9
Tighten Screws on Front Loader Bracket ...........95-8 Fuses and Relays (Tractors without Cab) ......125-10
Checking the Swinging Drawbar for Wear..........95-9 Fuses and Relays (without Cab) ....................125-10
Fuses F02 (without Cab) ................................125-10
Service / Every 500 Hours Fuses F03 (without Cab) ................................ 125-11
Changing Engine Oil.........................................100-1 Fuses F04 (without Cab) ................................ 125-11
Changing Engine Oil Filter Element .................100-1 Relays K01 (without Cab)...............................125-12
Changing the Fuel Filters .................................100-2 Relays/Diodes K03 (without Cab)...................125-12
Lubricating Rear Axle Bearings ........................100-2 Relays K04 (without Cab)...............................125-13
Air Intake Hoses ...............................................100-2 Fuses and Relays (Tractors with Cab) ...........125-14
Checking the Engine Ground Connection ........100-3 Fuses and Relays (with Cab) .........................125-14
Check the Cab Ground Connection..................100-3 Fuses F04 (with Cab) .....................................125-14
Check Engine Drive Belt for Wear....................100-3 Fuses F05 (with Cab) .....................................125-15
Fuses F06 (with Cab) .....................................125-15
Fuses F07 (with Cab) .....................................125-16
Service / Every 750 Hours
Relays K01 (with Cab)....................................125-16
Replace Transmission/Hydraulic Oil Filter........105-1
Relays K02 (with Cab)....................................125-17
Relays/Diodes K03 (with Cab)........................125-17
Service / Once a Year Relays K08 (with Cab)....................................125-18
Checking Seat Belt ........................................... 110-1 Relays K09 (with Cab)....................................125-18
Check Engine Coolant...................................... 110-1 Relays K10 (with Cab)....................................125-19
Replace the Drive Belt....................................125-20

Continued on next page

iv 021412

PN=4
 Contents

Page

Troubleshooting
Hydraulic System..............................................130-1
Engine ..............................................................130-2
Electrical System ..............................................130-3

Storage
Storage for a Long Period ................................135-1
Removing Tractor from Storage .......................135-2

Specifications
Engine (up to Model Year 2009).......................140-1
Engine (from Model Year 2010)........................140-2
Transmission ....................................................140-3
Hydraulic pressure............................................140-3
Loads and Weights...........................................140-4
Towed Mass......................................................140-4
Electrical System ..............................................140-5
Capacities.........................................................140-5
Permissible Front Axle Load in Relation
to Tires (Normal Operation)..........................140-6
Permissible Front Axle Load in Relation
to Tires (Operation with Front Loader) .........140-7
Permissible Rear Axle Load in Relation
to Tires .........................................................140-8
Unified Inch Bolt and Screw Torque Values......140-9
Metric Bolt and Screw Torque Values.............140-10
Limited Battery Warranty ................................ 140-11

Serial Numbers
Type Plates.......................................................145-1
Product Identification Number ..........................145-1
Engine Serial Number ......................................145-1
Transmission Serial Number ............................145-1
Front-Wheel Drive Axle Serial Number ............145-2
Serial Number of Operator's Cab .....................145-2
Keep Proof of Ownership .................................145-2
Keep Machines Secure ....................................145-3

Lubrication and Maintenance Records

Every 250 Hours...............................................150-1
Every 500 Hours...............................................150-1
Every 750 Hours...............................................150-2
Every 1000 Hours.............................................150-2
Every 1500 Hours.............................................150-3
Every 2000 Hours.............................................150-3
Every 6000 Hours.............................................150-4

v 021412

PN=5
Contents

vi 021412

PN=6
 Identification Views
Identification Views

LX1043823 —UN—20AUG07
LX1043824 —UN—20AUG07

Continued on next page OU12401,00017E6 -19-02AUG07-1/2

00-1 021412

PN=9
Identification Views

LX1043825 —UN—20AUG07
LX1043826 —UN—20AUG07

OU12401,00017E6 -19-02AUG07-2/2

00-2 021412

PN=10
 Safety
Recognize Safety Information
This is a safety-alert symbol. When you see this symbol
on your machine or in this manual, be alert to the potential
for personal injury.
Follow recommended precautions and safe operating

T81389 —UN—07DEC88
practices.

DX,ALERT -19-29SEP98-1/1

Understand Signal Words

A signal word—DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION—is
used with the safety-alert symbol. DANGER identifies the
most serious hazards.
DANGER or WARNING safety signs are located near
specific hazards. General precautions are listed on

TS187 —19—30SEP88
CAUTION safety signs. CAUTION also calls attention to
safety messages in this manual.

DX,SIGNAL -19-03MAR93-1/1

Follow Safety Instructions

Carefully read all safety messages in this manual and on
your machine safety signs. Keep safety signs in good
condition. Replace missing or damaged safety signs. Be
sure new equipment components and repair parts include
the current safety signs. Replacement safety signs are

TS201 —UN—23AUG88
available from your John Deere dealer.
There can be additional safety information contained on
parts and components sourced from suppliers that is not
reproduced in this operator's manual.
Learn how to operate the machine and how to use controls
properly. Do not let anyone operate without instruction.
Keep your machine in proper working condition.
If you do not understand any part of this manual and need
Unauthorized modifications to the machine may impair the
assistance, contact your John Deere dealer.
function and/or safety and affect machine life.
DX,READ -19-16JUN09-1/1

05-1 021412

PN=11
 Safety

Prepare for Emergencies

Be prepared if a fire starts.
Keep a first aid kit and fire extinguisher handy.
Keep emergency numbers for doctors, ambulance service,
hospital, and fire department near your telephone.

TS291 —UN—23AUG88
DX,FIRE2 -19-03MAR93-1/1

Wear Protective Clothing

Wear close fitting clothing and safety equipment
appropriate to the job.
Operating equipment safely requires the full attention of
the operator. Do not wear radio or music headphones

TS206 —UN—23AUG88
while operating machine.

DX,WEAR2 -19-03MAR93-1/1

Protect Against Noise

Prolonged exposure to loud noise can cause impairment
or loss of hearing.
Wear a suitable hearing protective device such as
earmuffs or earplugs to protect against objectionable or

TS207 —UN—23AUG88
uncomfortable loud noises.

DX,NOISE -19-03MAR93-1/1

05-2 021412

PN=12
 Safety

Handle Fuel Safely—Avoid Fires

Handle fuel with care: it is highly flammable. Do not refuel
the machine while smoking or when near open flame or
sparks.
Always stop engine before refueling machine. Fill fuel

TS202 —UN—23AUG88
tank outdoors.
Prevent fires by keeping machine clean of accumulated
trash, grease, and debris. Always clean up spilled fuel.
Use only an approved fuel container for transporting
flammable liquids.
Never fill fuel container in pickup truck with plastic bed
liner. Always place fuel container on ground before
refueling. Touch fuel container with fuel dispenser nozzle Do not store fuel container where there is an open flame,
before removing can lid. Keep fuel dispenser nozzle in spark, or pilot light such as within a water heater or other
contact with fuel container inlet when filling. appliance.
DX,FIRE1 -19-12OCT11-1/1

Handle Starting Fluid Safely

Starting fluid is highly flammable.
Keep all sparks and flame away when using it. Keep
starting fluid away from batteries and cables.
To prevent accidental discharge when storing the

TS1356 —UN—18MAR92
pressurized can, keep the cap on the container, and store
in a cool, protected location.
Do not incinerate or puncture a starting fluid container.

DX,FIRE3 -19-16APR92-1/1

Fire Prevention Operator’s Manual greatly reduce the risk of fire and the
chance of costly downtime.
To reduce the risk of fire, your tractor should be regularly • Do not store fuel container where there is an open
inspected and cleaned. flame, spark, or pilot light such as within a water heater
• Birds and other animals may build nests or bring other or other appliance.
flammable materials into the engine compartment • Check fuel lines, tank, cap, and fittings frequently for
or onto the exhaust system. The tractor should be damage, cracks or leaks. Replace if necessary.
inspected and cleaned prior to the first use each day. Follow all operational and safety procedures posted on
• A build up of grass, crop material and other debris may the machine and the Operator’s Manual. Be careful of hot
occur during normal operation. This is especially true engine and exhaust components during inspection and
when operating in very dry conditions or conditions cleaning. Before carrying out any inspection or cleaning,
where airborne crop material or crop dust is present. always shut OFF the engine, place the transmission in
Any such build up must be removed to ensure proper PARK or set parking brake, and remove the key. Removal
machine function and to reduce the risk of fire. The of the key will prevent others from starting the tractor
tractor must be inspected and cleaned periodically during inspection and cleaning.
throughout the day.
• Regular and thorough cleaning of the tractor combined
with other routine maintenance procedures listed in the
DX,WW,TRACTOR,FIRE,PREVENTION -19-12OCT11-1/1

05-3 021412

PN=13
 Safety

Keep ROPS Installed Properly

Make certain all parts are reinstalled correctly if the
roll-over protective structure (ROPS) is loosened or
removed for any reason. Tighten mounting bolts to proper
torque.

TS212 —UN—23AUG88
The protection offered by ROPS will be impaired if ROPS
is subjected to structural damage, is involved in an
overturn incident, or is in any way altered by welding,
bending, drilling, or cutting. A damaged ROPS should be
replaced, not reused.
The seat is part of the ROPS safety zone. Replace only
with John Deere seat approved for your tractor.
Any alteration of the ROPS must be approved by the
manufacturer.
DX,ROPS3 -19-12OCT11-1/1

Use Foldable ROPS and Seat Belt Properly

If this tractor is equipped with a foldable ROPS, keep the
ROPS in the fully extended and locked position. If the
tractor is ever operated with ROPS folded (e.g., to enter
a low building), drive with extreme caution. Do NOT use
seat belt with the ROPS folded.

TS205 —UN—23AUG88
Return the ROPS to the raised, fully extended and locked
position as soon as the tractor is operated under normal
conditions. Always fasten your seat belt when the ROPS
is fully extended and locked.

DX,FOLDROPS -19-31AUG99-1/1

05-4 021412

PN=14
 Safety

Stay Clear of Rotating Drivelines

Entanglement in rotating driveline can cause serious
injury or death.
Keep tractor master shield and driveline shields in place
at all times. Make sure rotating shields turn freely.

TS1644 —UN—22AUG95
Wear close fitting clothing. Stop the engine and be sure
that PTO driveline is stopped before making adjustments,
connections, or cleaning out PTO driven equipment.
Do not install any adapter device between the tractor and
the primary implement PTO drive shaft that will allow a
1000 rpm tractor shaft to power a 540 rpm implement at
speeds higher than 540 rpm.
Do not install any adapter device that results in a portion of
the rotating implement shaft, tractor shaft, or the adapter
to be unguarded. The tractor master shield shall overlap
the end of the splined shaft and the added adaptor device
as outlined in the table.
PTO Type Diameter Splines n ± 5 mm (0.20 in.)
1 35 mm (1.378 in.) 6 85 mm (3.35 in.)
2 35 mm (1.378 in.) 21 85 mm (3.35 in.)
3 45 mm (1.772 in.) 20 100 mm (4.00 in.)

H96219 —UN—29APR10
DX,PTO -19-30JUN10-1/1

Use Steps and Handholds Correctly

Prevent falls by facing the machine when getting on and

T133468 —UN—30AUG00
off. Maintain 3-point contact with steps, handholds, and
handrails.
Use extra care when mud, snow, or moisture present
slippery conditions. Keep steps clean and free of grease
or oil. Never jump when exiting machine. Never mount or
dismount a moving machine.

DX,WW,MOUNT -19-12OCT11-1/1

Read Operator Manuals for ISOBUS Implements

In addition to GreenStar Applications, this display can responsibility of the implement manufacturer. Some of
be used as a display device for any implement that these implement functions could provide a hazard either
meets ISO 11783 standard. This includes capability to to the Operator or a bystander. Read the operator manual
control ISOBUS implements. When used in this manner, provided by the implement manufacturer and observe all
information and implement control functions placed on safety messages in manual and on implement prior to use.
the display are provided by the implement and are the
NOTE: ISOBUS refers to the ISO Standard 11783
DX,WW,ISOBUS -19-19AUG09-1/1

05-5 021412

PN=15
 Safety

Use Seat Belt Properly

Use a seat belt when you operate with a roll-over
protective structure (ROPS) or cab to minimize chance of
injury from an accident such as an overturn.
Do not use a seat belt if operating without a ROPS or cab.

TS205 —UN—23AUG88
Replace entire seat belt if mounting hardware, buckle,
belt, or retractor show signs of damage.
Inspect seat belt and mounting hardware at least
once a year. Look for signs of loose hardware or belt
damage, such as cuts, fraying, extreme or unusual wear,
discoloration, or abrasion. Replace only with replacement
parts approved for your machine. See your John Deere
dealer.
DX,ROPS1 -19-29OCT07-1/1

05-6 021412

PN=16
 Safety

Operating the Tractor Safely

You can reduce the risk of accidents by following these
simple precautions:
• Use your tractor only for jobs it was designed to perform,
for example, pushing, pulling, towing, actuating, and

TS290 —UN—23AUG88
carrying a variety of interchangeable equipment
designed to conduct agricultural work.
• This tractor is not intended to be used as a recreational
vehicle.
• Read this operator’s manual before operating the
tractor and follow operating and safety instructions in
the manual and on the tractor.
• Follow operation and ballasting instructions found in the
operator’s manual for your implements/attachments,
such as front loaders
• Make sure that everyone is clear of machine, attached
equipment, and work area before starting engine or
operation.
• Keep hands, feet, and clothing away from power-driven

TS276 —UN—23AUG88
parts
Driving Concerns

• Never get on or off a moving tractor.

• Keep all children and nonessential personnel off tractors
and all equipment.
• Never ride on a tractor unless seated on a John Deere
approved seat with seat belt. and securely engage park mechanism, including the
• Keep all shields/guards in place. park pawl and park brake. In addition, if tractor is left
• Use appropriate visual and audible signals when unattended, remove key.
operating on public roads. • Leaving transmission in gear with engine off will NOT
• Move to side of road before stopping. prevent the tractor from moving.
• Reduce speed when turning, applying individual brakes, • Never go near an operating PTO or an operating
or operating around hazards on rough ground or steep implement.
slopes. • Wait for all movement to stop before servicing
• Couple brake pedals together for road travel. machinery.
• Pump brakes when stopping on slippery surfaces.
Common Accidents
Towing Loads
Unsafe operation or misuse of the tractor can result in
• Be careful when towing and stopping heavy loads. accidents. Be alert to hazards of tractor operation.
Stopping distance increases with speed and weight
of towed loads, and on slopes. Towed loads with or The most common accidents involving tractors:
without brakes that are too heavy for the tractor or are
towed too fast can cause loss of control. • Tractor rollover
• Consider the total weight of the equipment and its load. • Collisions with motor vehicles
• Hitch towed loads only to approved couplings to avoid • Improper starting procedures
rearward upset. • Entanglement in PTO shafts
• Falling from tractor
Parking and Leaving the Tractor • Crushing and pinching during hitching
• Before dismounting, shut off SCVs, disengage PTO,
stop engine, lower implements/attachments to ground
DX,WW,TRACTOR -19-21AUG09-1/1

05-7 021412

PN=17
 Safety

Avoid Backover Accidents

Before moving machine, be sure that all persons are clear
of machine path. Turn around and look directly for best
visibility. Use a signal person when backing if view is

PC10857XW —UN—24JUN10
obstructed or when in close quarters.
Do not rely on a camera to determine if personnel or
obstacles are behind the machine. The system can be
limited by many factors including maintenance practices,
environmental conditions, and operating range.

DX,AVOID,BACKOVER,ACCIDENTS -19-30AUG10-1/1

Limited Use in Forestry Operation These are applications where normal operation does not
The intended use of John Deere tractors when used present a risk of falling or penetrating objects. Any forestry
in forestry operations is limited to tractor-specific applications beyond these applications, such as forwarding
applications like transport, stationary work such as log and loading, requires fitment of application-specific
splitting, propulsion, or operating implements with PTO, components including Falling Object Protective Structure
hydraulic, or electrical systems. (FOPS) and/or Operative Protective Structures (OPS).
Contact John Deere dealer for special components.
DX,WW,FORESTRY -19-12OCT11-1/1

Operating the Loader Tractor Safely

When operating a machine with a loader application,
reduce speed as required to ensure good tractor and
loader stability.
To avoid tractor rollover and damage to front tires and

TS1692 —UN—09NOV09
tractor, do not carry load with your loader at a speed over
10 km/h (6 mph).
To avoid tractor damage do not use a front loader or a
sprayer tank if the tractor is equipped with a 3 Meter Front
Axle.
Never allow anyone to walk or work under a raised loader.
Do not use loader as a work platform. falling onto the operators station. To prevent loads from
Do not lift or carry anyone on loader, in bucket, or on falling onto the operators station, always use appropriate
implement or attachment. implements for specific applications (that is, manure forks,
round bale forks, round bale grippers, and clampers).
Lower loader to ground before leaving operators station.
The Rollover Protective Structure (ROPS) or cab roof, if
equipped, may not provide sufficient protection from load
DX,WW,LOADER -19-11NOV09-1/1

05-8 021412

PN=18
 Safety

Keep Riders Off Machine

Only allow the operator on the machine. Keep riders off.
Riders on machine are subject to injury such as being
struck by foreign objects and being thrown off of the
machine. Riders also obstruct the operator’s view resulting

TS290 —UN—23AUG88
in the machine being operated in an unsafe manner.

DX,RIDER -19-03MAR93-1/1

Instructional Seat
The instructional seat, if so equipped, has been provided
only for training operators or diagnosing machine
problems.

RXA0103436 —UN—15JUN09
DX,SEAT,NA -19-19AUG09-1/1

Use Safety Lights and Devices

Prevent collisions between other road users, slow moving
tractors with attachments or towed equipment, and
self-propelled machines on public roads. Frequently
check for traffic from the rear, especially in turns, and use
turn signal lights.
Use headlights, flashing warning lights, and turn signals
day and night. Follow local regulations for equipment
lighting and marking. Keep lighting and marking visible,
clean, and in good working order. Replace or repair
lighting and marking that has been damaged or lost. An
implement safety lighting kit is available from your John

TS951 —UN—12APR90
Deere dealer.

DX,FLASH -19-07JUL99-1/1

05-9 021412

PN=19
 Safety

Use a Safety Chain

A safety chain will help control drawn equipment should it
accidentally separate from the drawbar.
Using the appropriate adapter parts, attach the chain to the
tractor drawbar support or other specified anchor location.

TS217 —UN—23AUG88
Provide only enough slack in the chain to permit turning.
See your John Deere dealer for a chain with a strength
rating equal to or greater than the gross weight of the
towed machine. Do not use safety chain for towing.

DX,CHAIN -19-03MAR93-1/1

Transport Towed Equipment at Safe Speeds

Do not exceed the maximum transport speed. This tractor
is capable of operating at transport speeds that exceed
the maximum allowable transport speed for most towed
implements.
Before transporting a towed implement, determine from
signs on the implement or information provided in the
implement's operator manual the maximum transport
speed. Never transport at speeds that exceed the
implement's maximum transport speed. Exceeding the
implement's maximum transport speed can result in:
• Loss of control of the tractor/implement combination

TS1686 —UN—27SEP06
• Reduced or no ability to stop during braking
• Implement tire failure
• Damage to the implement structure or its components
Implements without brakes:
• Do not transport at speeds greater than 32 km/h (20
mph).
• Must weigh less than 1.5 times the tractor weight and
less than 1.5 t (3300 lb) when fully loaded.
• When transporting at speeds between 40—50 km/h
Implements with brakes: (25—31 mph) the fully loaded implement must weigh
• If the manufacturer does not specify a maximum less than 3.0 times the tractor weight.
transport speed, do not tow at speeds greater than 40
km/h (25 mph).
• When transporting at speeds up to 40 km/h (25 mph)
the fully loaded implement must weigh less than 4.5
times the tractor weight.
DX,TOW1 -19-12OCT11-1/1

05-10 021412

PN=20
 Safety

Use Caution On Slopes and Uneven Terrain

Avoid holes, ditches, and obstructions which cause the
tractor to tip, especially on slopes. Avoid sharp uphill turns.
Driving forward out of a ditch, mired condition, or up a

RXA0103437 —UN—01JUL09
steep slope could cause tractor to tip over rearward. Back
out of these situations if possible.
Danger of overturn increases greatly with narrow tread
setting, at high speed.
Not all conditions that can cause a tractor to overturn are
listed. Be alert for any situation in which stability may be
compromised.
Slopes are a major factor related to loss-of-control and
tip-over accidents, which can result in severe injury or Avoid starting, stopping or turning on a slope. If the tires
death. Operation on all slopes requires extra caution lose traction, disengage the PTO and proceed slowly,
straight down the slope.
Never drive near the edge of a gully, drop-off, ditch, steep
embankment, or a body of water. The machine could Keep all movement on slopes slow and gradual. Do not
suddenly roll over if a wheel goes over the edge or the make sudden changes in speed or direction, which could
ground caves in cause the machine to roll over.
Choose a low ground speed so you will not have to stop
or shift while on a slope.
DX,WW,SLOPE -19-12OCT11-1/1

Freeing a Mired Machine

Attempting to free a mired machine can involve safety
hazards such as the mired tractor tipping rearward, the
towing tractor overturning, and the tow chain or tow bar
(a cable is not recommended) failing and recoiling from
its stretched condition.

TS1645 —UN—15SEP95
Back your tractor out if it gets mired down in mud. Unhitch
any towed implements. Dig mud from behind the rear
wheels. Place boards behind the wheels to provide a solid
base and try to back out slowly. If necessary, dig mud
from the front of all wheels and drive slowly ahead.
If necessary to tow with another unit, use a tow bar or
a long chain (a cable is not recommended). Inspect the
chain for flaws. Make sure all parts of towing devices are
of adequate size and strong enough to handle the load.
Always hitch to the drawbar of the towing unit. Do not
hitch to the front pushbar attachment point. Before
moving, clear the area of people. Apply power smoothly
TS263 —UN—23AUG88
to take up the slack: a sudden pull could snap any towing
device causing it to whip or recoil dangerously.

DX,MIRED -19-07JUL99-1/1

05-11 021412

PN=21
 Safety

Avoid Contact with Agricultural Chemicals

This enclosed cab does not protect against inhaling
vapor, aerosol or dust. If pesticide use instructions require
respiratory protection, wear an appropriate respirator
inside the cab.

TS220 —UN—23AUG88
Before leaving the cab, wear personal protective
equipment as required by the pesticide use instructions.
When re-entering the cab, remove protective equipment
and store either outside the cab in a closed box or some
other type of sealable container or inside the cab in a
pesticide resistant container, such as a plastic bag.
Clean your shoes or boots to remove soil or other
contaminated particles prior to entering the cab.

TS272 —UN—23AUG88
DX,CABS -19-25MAR09-1/1

05-12 021412

PN=22
 Safety

Handle Agricultural Chemicals Safely

Chemicals used in agricultural applications such
as fungicides, herbicides, insecticides, pesticides,
rodenticides, and fertilizers can be harmful to your health
or the environment if not used carefully.

TS220 —UN—23AUG88
Always follow all label directions for effective, safe, and
legal use of agricultural chemicals.
Reduce risk of exposure and injury:
• Wear appropriate personal protective equipment as
recommended by the manufacturer. In the absence
of manufacturer's instructions, follow these general
guidelines:
- Chemicals labeled 'Danger': Most toxic. Generally
require use of goggles, respirator, gloves, and skin
protection.
- Chemicals labeled 'Warning': Less toxic. Generally
require use of goggles, gloves, and skin protections.

A34471 —UN—11OCT88
- Chemicals labeled 'Caution': Least toxic. Generally
require use of gloves and skin protection.
• Avoid inhaling vapor, aerosol or dust.
• Always have soap, water, and towel available when
working with chemicals. If chemical contacts skin,
hands, or face, wash immediately with soap and water.
If chemical gets into eyes, flush immediately with water.
• Wash hands and face after using chemicals and before
eating, drinking, smoking, or urination.
• Do not smoke or eat while applying chemicals. • Store chemicals in a secure, locked area away from
human or livestock food. Keep children away.
• After handling chemicals, always bathe or shower and
• Always dispose of containers properly. Triple rinse
change clothes. Wash clothing before wearing again.
empty containers and puncture or crush containers and
• Seek medical attention immediately if illness occurs
dispose of properly.
during or shortly after use of chemicals.
• Keep chemicals in original containers. Do not transfer
chemicals to unmarked containers or to containers used
for food or drink.
DX,WW,CHEM01 -19-24AUG10-1/1

05-13 021412

PN=23
 Safety

Handling Batteries Safely

Battery gas can explode. Keep sparks and flames away
from batteries. Use a flashlight to check battery electrolyte
level.
Never check battery charge by placing a metal object

TS204 —UN—23AUG88
across the posts. Use a voltmeter or hydrometer.
Always remove grounded (-) battery clamp first and
replace grounded clamp last.
Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte is poisonous and strong
enough to burn skin, eat holes in clothing, and cause
blindness if splashed into eyes.
Avoid hazards by:
• Filling batteries in a well-ventilated area
• Wearing eye protection and rubber gloves
• Avoiding use of air pressure to clean batteries
• Avoiding breathing fumes when electrolyte is added
• Avoiding spilling or dripping electrolyte
• Using correct battery booster or charger procedure.
If acid is spilled on skin or in eyes:
1. Flush skin with water.
2. Apply baking soda or lime to help neutralize the acid.
3. Flush eyes with water for 15—30 minutes. Get
medical attention immediately.
If acid is swallowed:
1. Do not induce vomiting.
2. Drink large amounts of water or milk, but do not
exceed 2 L (2 qt.).
3. Get medical attention immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals, and related

TS203 —UN—23AUG88
accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.

DX,WW,BATTERIES -19-02DEC10-1/1

Avoid Heating Near Pressurized Fluid Lines

Flammable spray can be generated by heating near
pressurized fluid lines, resulting in severe burns to yourself
and bystanders. Do not heat by welding, soldering,
or using a torch near pressurized fluid lines or other
flammable materials. Pressurized lines can accidentally
TS953 —UN—15MAY90

burst when heat goes beyond the immediate flame area.

DX,TORCH -19-10DEC04-1/1

05-14 021412

PN=24
 Safety

Remove Paint Before Welding or Heating

Avoid potentially toxic fumes and dust.
Hazardous fumes can be generated when paint is heated
by welding, soldering, or using a torch.
Remove paint before heating:

TS220 —UN—23AUG88
• Remove paint a minimum of 100 mm (4 in.) from area
to be affected by heating. If paint cannot be removed,
wear an approved respirator before heating or welding.
• If you sand or grind paint, avoid breathing the dust.
Wear an approved respirator.
• If you use solvent or paint stripper, remove stripper with
soap and water before welding. Remove solvent or
paint stripper containers and other flammable material
from area. Allow fumes to disperse at least 15 minutes Do all work in an area that is well ventilated to carry toxic
before welding or heating. fumes and dust away.

Do not use a chlorinated solvent in areas where welding Dispose of paint and solvent properly.
will take place.
DX,PAINT -19-24JUL02-1/1

Welding Near Electronic Control Units

IMPORTANT: Do not jump-start engines with arc
welding equipment. Currents and voltages are
too high and may cause permanent damage.

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable(s).

TS953 —UN—15MAY90
2. Disconnect the positive (+) battery cable(s).
3. Connect the positive and negative cables together. Do
not attach to vehicle frame.
4. Clear or move any wiring harness sections away from
welding area.
5. Connect welder ground close to welding point and
away from control units. 6. After welding, reverse Steps 1—5.
DX,WW,ECU02 -19-14AUG09-1/1

Handle Electronic Components and Brackets

Safely
Falling while installing or removing electronic components
mounted on equipment can cause serious injury. Use a
ladder or platform to easily reach each mounting location.
Use sturdy and secure footholds and handholds. Do not
TS249 —UN—23AUG88

install or remove components in wet or icy conditions.

If installing or servicing a RTK base station on a tower or
other tall structure, use a certified climber.
If installing or servicing a global positioning receiver mast
used on an implement, use proper lifting techniques and
wear proper protective equipment. The mast is heavy and
can be awkward to handle. Two people are required when
mounting locations are not accessible from the ground
or from a service platform.
DX,WW,RECEIVER -19-24AUG10-1/1

05-15 021412

PN=25
 Safety

Practice Safe Maintenance

Understand service procedure before doing work. Keep
area clean and dry.
Never lubricate, service, or adjust machine while it is
moving. Keep hands, feet , and clothing from power-driven
parts. Disengage all power and operate controls to relieve
pressure. Lower equipment to the ground. Stop the
engine. Remove the key. Allow machine to cool.
Securely support any machine elements that must be
raised for service work.
Keep all parts in good condition and properly installed.
Fix damage immediately. Replace worn or broken parts.
Remove any buildup of grease, oil, or debris.
On self-propelled equipment, disconnect battery ground
cable (-) before making adjustments on electrical systems
or welding on machine.
On towed implements, disconnect wiring harnesses from
tractor before servicing electrical system components or
welding on machine.

TS218 —UN—23AUG88
DX,SERV -19-17FEB99-1/1

Avoid Hot Exhaust

Servicing machine or attachments with engine running
can result in serious personal injury. Avoid exposure and
skin contact with hot exhaust gases and components.
Exhaust parts and streams become very hot during

RG17488 —UN—21AUG09
operation. Exhaust gases and components reach
temperatures hot enough to burn people, ignite, or melt
common materials.

DX,EXHAUST -19-20AUG09-1/1

05-16 021412

PN=26
 Safety

Work In Ventilated Area

Engine exhaust fumes can cause sickness or death. If
it is necessary to run an engine in an enclosed area,
remove the exhaust fumes from the area with an exhaust
pipe extension.

TS220 —UN—23AUG88
If you do not have an exhaust pipe extension, open the
doors and get outside air into the area.

DX,AIR -19-17FEB99-1/1

Support Machine Properly

Always lower the attachment or implement to the ground
before you work on the machine. If the work requires
that the machine or attachment be lifted, provide secure
support for them. If left in a raised position, hydraulically
supported devices can settle or leak down.

TS229 —UN—23AUG88
Do not support the machine on cinder blocks, hollow tiles,
or props that may crumble under continuous load. Do not
work under a machine that is supported solely by a jack.
Follow recommended procedures in this manual.
When implements or attachments are used with a
machine, always follow safety precautions listed in the
implement or attachment operator's manual.
DX,LOWER -19-24FEB00-1/1

Prevent Machine Runaway

Avoid possible injury or death from machinery runaway.
Do not start engine by shorting across starter terminals.
Machine will start in gear if normal circuitry is bypassed.
NEVER start engine while standing on ground. Start

TS177 —UN—11JAN89
engine only from operator’s seat, with transmission in
neutral or park.

DX,BYPAS1 -19-29SEP98-1/1

05-17 021412

PN=27
 Safety

Park Machine Safely

Before working on the machine:
• Lower all equipment to the ground.
• Stop the engine and remove the key.
• Disconnect the battery ground strap.
• Hang a "DO NOT OPERATE" tag in operator station.

TS230 —UN—24MAY89
DX,PARK -19-04JUN90-1/1

Transport Tractor Safely

A disabled tractor is best transported on a flatbed carrier.
Use chains to secure the tractor to the carrier. The axles
and tractor frame are suitable attachment points.

RXA0103709 —UN—01JUL09
Before transporting the tractor on a low-loader truck or
flatbed rail wagon, make sure that the hood is secured
over the tractor engine and that doors, roof hatch (if
equipped) and windows are properly closed.
Never tow a tractor at a speed greater than 10 km/h (6
mph). An operator must steer and brake the tractor under
tow.

DX,WW,TRANSPORT -19-19AUG09-1/1

Service Cooling System Safely

Explosive release of fluids from pressurized cooling
system can cause serious burns.
Shut off engine. Only remove filler cap when cool enough
to touch with bare hands. Slowly loosen cap to first stop

TS281 —UN—23AUG88
to relieve pressure before removing completely.

DX,WW,COOLING -19-19AUG09-1/1

05-18 021412

PN=28
 Safety

Service Accumulator Systems Safely

Escaping fluid or gas from systems with pressurized
accumulators that are used in air conditioning, hydraulic,
and air brake systems can cause serious injury. Extreme
heat can cause the accumulator to burst, and pressurized
lines can be accidentally cut. Do not weld or use a torch

TS281 —UN—23AUG88
near a pressurized accumulator or pressurized line.
Relieve pressure from the pressurized system before
removing accumulator.
Relieve pressure from the hydraulic system before
removing accumulator. Never attempt to relieve hydraulic
system or accumulator pressure by loosening a fitting.
Accumulators cannot be repaired.
DX,WW,ACCLA2 -19-22AUG03-1/1

Service Tires Safely

Explosive separation of a tire and rim parts can cause
serious injury or death.
Do not attempt to mount a tire unless you have the proper

RXA0103438 —UN—11JUN09
equipment and experience to perform the job.
Always maintain the correct tire pressure. Do not inflate
the tires above the recommended pressure. Never weld
or heat a wheel and tire assembly. The heat can cause
an increase in air pressure resulting in a tire explosion.
Welding can structurally weaken or deform the wheel.
When inflating tires, use a clip-on chuck and extension
hose long enough to allow you to stand to one side and
NOT in front of or over the tire assembly. Use a safety
cage if available.
Check wheels for low pressure, cuts, bubbles, damaged
rims, or missing lug bolts and nuts.
DX,WW,RIMS -19-19AUG09-1/1

Service Front-Wheel Drive Tractor Safely

When servicing front-wheel drive tractor with the rear
wheels supported off the ground and rotating wheels by
engine power, always support front wheels in a similar
manner. Loss of electrical power or transmission hydraulic
system pressure will engage the front driving wheels,
pulling the rear wheels off the support if front wheels are L124515 —UN—06AUG94
not raised. Under these conditions, front drive wheels can
engage even with switch in disengaged position.

DX,WW,MFWD -19-19AUG09-1/1

05-19 021412

PN=29
 Safety

Tightening Wheel Retaining Bolts/Nuts

Torque wheel retaining bolts/nuts at the intervals specified
in section Break-In Period and Service.

L124516 —UN—03JAN95
DX,WW,WHEEL -19-12OCT11-1/1

Avoid High-Pressure Fluids

Inspect hydraulic hoses periodically – at least once
per year – for leakage, kinking, cuts, cracks, abrasion,
blisters, corrosion, exposed wire braid or any other signs
of wear or damage.

X9811 —UN—23AUG88
Replace worn or damaged hose assemblies immediately
with John Deere approved replacement parts.
Escaping fluid under pressure can penetrate the skin
causing serious injury.
Avoid the hazard by relieving pressure before
disconnecting hydraulic or other lines. Tighten all
connections before applying pressure.
with this type of injury should reference a knowledgeable
Search for leaks with a piece of cardboard. Protect hands medical source. Such information is available in
and body from high-pressure fluids. English from Deere & Company Medical Department in
Moline, Illinois, U.S.A., by calling 1-800-822-8262 or +1
If an accident occurs, see a doctor immediately. Any fluid 309-748-5636.
injected into the skin must be surgically removed within
a few hours or gangrene may result. Doctors unfamiliar
DX,FLUID -19-12OCT11-1/1

Do Not Open High-Pressure Fuel System

High-pressure fluid remaining in fuel lines can cause
serious injury. Do not disconnect or attempt repair of fuel
lines, sensors, or any other components between the
high-pressure fuel pump and nozzles on engines with
High Pressure Common Rail (HPCR) fuel system.
TS1343 —UN—18MAR92

Only technicians familiar with this type of system can

perform repairs. (See your John Deere dealer.)

DX,WW,HPCR1 -19-07JAN03-1/1

05-20 021412

PN=30
 Safety

Store Attachments Safely

Stored attachments such as dual wheels, cage wheels,
and loaders can fall and cause serious injury or death.
Securely store attachments and implements to prevent
falling. Keep playing children and bystanders away from

TS219 —UN—23AUG88
storage area.

DX,STORE -19-03MAR93-1/1

Dispose of Waste Properly

Improperly disposing of waste can threaten the
environment and ecology. Potentially harmful waste used
with John Deere equipment include such items as oil, fuel,
coolant, brake fluid, filters, and batteries.

TS1133 —UN—26NOV90
Use leakproof containers when draining fluids. Do not use
food or beverage containers that may mislead someone
into drinking from them.
Do not pour waste onto the ground, down a drain, or into
any water source.
Air conditioning refrigerants escaping into the air can
damage the Earth’s atmosphere. Government regulations
may require a certified air conditioning service center to
recover and recycle used air conditioning refrigerants.
Inquire on the proper way to recycle or dispose of waste
from your local environmental or recycling center, or from
your John Deere dealer.
DX,DRAIN -19-03MAR93-1/1

05-21 021412

PN=31
 Safety Decals
Prevent Machine Runaway

LX1042925 —19—06NOV07
OU12401,0001736 -19-23APR07-1/1

Use Seat Belt

LX1043880 —19—06NOV07
OU12401,0001832 -19-27AUG07-1/1

10-1 021412

PN=32
 Safety Decals

Operate the Tractor Safely

LX1047165 —19—15DEC08

OU12401,0001B0F -19-25JAN09-1/1

10-2 021412

PN=33
 Safety Decals

Do Not Modify “ROPS”

LX1043882 —19—06NOV07
OU12401,0001834 -19-27AUG07-1/1

Tow Loads Safely

LX1047166 —19—15DEC08

OU12401,0001B10 -19-25JAN09-1/1

10-3 021412

PN=34
 Safety Decals

Use of Instructional Seat

LX1042928 —19—06NOV07
OU12401,0001739 -19-25APR07-1/1

Stay Clear of PTO

LX1042929 —19—06NOV07
OU12401,000173A -19-23APR07-1/1

10-4 021412

PN=35
 Safety Decals

Regular ROPS Position

LX1047167 —19—15DEC08
OU12401,0001B11 -19-25JAN09-1/1

Never Carry Riders

LX1047168 —19—15DEC08

OU12401,0001B12 -19-25JAN09-1/1

10-5 021412

PN=36
 Safety Decals

Caution with Front Loader Operation

LX1047169 —19—15DEC08
Tractor with Open Operator's Station
OU12401,0001B13 -19-17SEP10-1/1

Caution with Front Loader Operation

LX1049813 —19—16SEP10

Tractor with Operator's Cab

OULXBER,0001986 -19-17SEP10-1/1

10-6 021412

PN=37
 Controls and Instruments
Vehicle Controls

LX1043827 —UN—20AUG07
A—Clutch pedal K—Gear shift switches
B—Hazard warning light switch L— Hand throttle
C—Light switch M—Gear shift switch (extra)
D—Turn signal lever N—Accelerator pedal
E—Reverser lever O—Main (key) switch
F— Travel speed P—Left and right brake pedals

LX1043828 —UN—20AUG07
G—Tachometer Q—Differential lock
H—Windshield wiper switch R—Gear shift lever
J— Range shift lever

Tractors with PowrQuad transmission

LX1043829 —UN—20AUG07

Tractors with low-profile platform

OU12401,00017E8 -19-19AUG07-1/1

15-1 021412

PN=38
 Controls and Instruments

PTO and Creeper Controls

A—Rear PTO switch B—Creeper lever

LX1043866 —UN—23AUG07

LX1043867 —UN—24AUG07
OU12401,000180D -19-22AUG07-1/1

Attachment Controls
A—Three-point hitch control B—Levers for selective control
unit valves

LX1043830 —UN—20AUG07
OU12401,00017E9 -19-19AUG07-1/1

Heater and Air-Conditioning Controls

A—Fan switch C—Heater and air-conditioning
B—Airflow regulator regulator
D—Air conditioning switch

LX1042577 —UN—29MAY07
OULXE59,00108D8 -19-27JAN07-1/1

15-2 021412

PN=39
 Controls and Instruments

Indicator Lights and Displays

Indicator lights

LX1029237 —UN—05MAY03
1-This light comes on when the differential lock is engaged. the alternator wiring. If necessary, have the alternator
checked by your John Deere dealer.
2-This light comes on when front-wheel drive is engaged.
9-If the air cleaner indicator light comes on with the
3-This light comes on when the rear PTO is engaged. engine running, the air cleaner element must be cleaned
4-This warning light comes on when the or replaced.
transmission/hydraulic oil temperature is too high. 10-This light glows when the transmission oil filter is
5-If this warning light comes on, transmission/hydraulic oil clogged or the oil temperature is too low.
pressure is too low. See your John Deere dealer. 11-This light comes on when the worklights are switched
6-If the engine oil pressure warning light comes on with on.
the engine running, shut off the engine and check the Light test: As the engine is started, lights 4, 5, 6, 9 and 10
engine oil level. come on for approx. 1 second. If not, a defective fuse or
7-The high beam indicator light is on with high beam bulb may be the cause. Replace part.
headlights on. Once the engine is running, the indicator lights must turn
8-If the alternator indicator light comes on with the off.
engine running, it indicates an alternator problem. Check
OULXE59,00109DB -19-18NOV11-1/8

Additional indicator light

This light comes on when the main (key) switch is turned
one position to the right. Do not start the engine before
the light has turned off.

LX1042578 —UN—29MAY07
This light flashes when problems with the fuel system and
the engine are present.
NOTE: On tractors equipped with a water-in-fuel
sensor, this light flashes when water is
present in the fuel filter.

Continued on next page OULXE59,00109DB -19-18NOV11-2/8

15-3 021412

PN=40
 Controls and Instruments

Digital display
On the digital display the travel speed, rear PTO speed,
operating hours, coolant temperature and fuel level are
displayed.

LX1030684 —UN—06MAY08
OULXE59,00109DB -19-18NOV11-3/8

Travel speed display

With the rear PTO off, km/h or MPH and the travel speed
are displayed.

LX1030685 —UN—06MAY08
OULXE59,00109DB -19-18NOV11-4/8

PTO speed display

With rear PTO on, the PTO symbol is displayed. The rear
PTO speed is displayed if the tractor is equipped with a
PTO speed sensor.

LX1030686 —UN—06MAY08
Continued on next page OULXE59,00109DB -19-18NOV11-5/8

15-4 021412

PN=41
 Controls and Instruments

Operating hours display

When the ignition is turned on, the display shows the
number of hours operated by the engine.

LX1030687 —UN—06MAY08
OULXE59,00109DB -19-18NOV11-6/8

Coolant temperature display

Temperature is represented by a vertical bar with a total
of 12 blocks (A):
1-10 blocks = temperature is normal.

LX1053328 —UN—18NOV11
11 (flashing) blocks = coolant is too hot. Reduce the
engine load or select a lower gear.
12 (flashing) blocks = coolant is very hot. Shut off the
engine and rectify the cause of the overheating (coolant
level too low, dirty radiator or clogged screen).
If none of the blocks appear on the display and icon (B) is
flashing, the temperature sensor is defective.
A—Coolant Temperature C—10 black Blocks,
Display Temperature of 40 - 110° C
B—Icon (104 - 230° F)
D—2 red Blocks, Temperature
of 110 - 120° C (230 - 248° F)

OULXE59,00109DB -19-18NOV11-7/8

Fuel reserve display

The amount of fuel left in reserve is represented by a
vertical bar with a total of 12 blocks (A):
3-12 blocks = sufficient fuel left in reserve.
LX1030689 —UN—06MAY08
2 blocks = fuel reserve warning.
1 (flashing) block = less than 8% fuel left in reserve.
If none of the blocks appear on the display and icon (B) is
flashing, the tank sensor is defective.

OULXE59,00109DB -19-18NOV11-8/8

Software Update
After a software or hardware update, there may be new not described in this Operator's Manual. Ask your John
or additional functions available on the tractor that are Deere dealer.
OU12401,0001AE1 -19-11NOV08-1/1

15-5 021412

PN=42
 Lights
Light Switches (Tractors with Cab)

CAUTION: Comply with local lighting regulations.

Light switch (A) can be set to the following positions:

LX1043831 —UN—21AUG07
• 1 = Light switch in “off” position
• 2 = Headlights, tail lights and warning lights “on”
• 3 = Headlights “on”
• 4 = Headlights “on” and worklights can be switched on
Switch headlights to “low beam” or “high beam” position
by means of switch (B).
• Pull switch toward steering wheel = Headlight flasher
(“flash-to-pass”)
• Switch in center = Low beam
• Push switch away from steering wheel = High beam
Indicator light (C) will glow when headlight switch is in

LX1043832 —UN—21AUG07
“high beam” position.

L102655 —UN—15AUG94

OU12401,00017ED -19-20AUG07-1/1

Worklight Switches (Tractors with Cab)

The worklights can be switched on and off using the
switches shown here. The main light switch must first be
set to position 4.

LX1043833 —UN—21AUG07
A—Front roof worklights C—Front corner worklights (if
B—Rear roof worklights equipped)

OU12401,00017EE -19-20AUG07-1/1

20-1 021412

PN=43
 Lights

Light Switches (Tractors without Cab)

CAUTION: Comply with local lighting regulations.

Light switch (A) can be set to the following positions:

LX1043834 —UN—21AUG07
• 1 = Light switch in “off” position
• 2 = Headlights, tail lights and warning lights “on”
• 3 = Headlights “on”
• 4 = Headlights “on” and
• Worklight on, if the tractor is equipped with only one
worklight
• Worklights may be switched on, if the tractor is equipped
with more than one worklight L102655 —UN—15AUG94

Switch headlights to “low beam” or “high beam” position

by means of switch (B).
• Switch down = Low beam
• Switch up = High beam
Indicator light (C) will glow when headlight switch is in
“high beam” position.

OU12401,00017EF -19-20AUG07-1/1

Worklight Switches (Tractors without Cab)

The worklights can be switched on and off using the
switches shown here. The main light switch must first be
set to position 4.

LX1043835 —UN—21AUG07
LX1043836 —UN—21AUG07

OU12401,00017F0 -19-20AUG07-1/1

20-2 021412

PN=44
 Lights

Additional Headlights (Optional Equipment)

Additional headlights may be attached to the cab frame.
Switch (A) allows the operator to choose between normal
headlights and these additional lights (e.g. when front
attachments are installed).

LX1043837 —UN—21AUG07
OU12401,00017F1 -19-20AUG07-1/1

Beacon Light (Optional Equipment)

The beacon light should be used as recommended by
local laws (e.g. when driving extremely slowly and when
tractor width is excessive).

LX1043838 —UN—21AUG07
Switch (A) is for switching the beacon light on and off.

OU12401,00017F2 -19-20AUG07-1/1

20-3 021412

PN=45
 Lights

Lights

LX1043839 —UN—21AUG07

LX1043840 —UN—21AUG07
LX1043841 —UN—21AUG07

LX1043842 —UN—21AUG07
1
A—Headlights C—Front corner worklights E—Worklights / headlights on G—Worklights at rear
1
B—Turn signal and warning lights D—Front worklights cab frame H—Socket for trailer lighting
F— Tail, brake and turn signal
lights

NOTE: H9 bulbs must NOT be used in front

corner worklights (C).

1
If equipped
OU12401,00017F3 -19-20AUG07-1/1

20-4 021412

PN=46
 Lights

Use Safety Lights and Devices

Prevent collisions between other road users, slow moving
tractors with attachments or towed equipment, and
self-propelled machines on public roads. Frequently
check for traffic from the rear, especially in turns, and use
turn signal lights.
Use headlights, flashing warning lights, and turn signals
day and night. Follow local regulations for equipment
lighting and marking. Keep lighting and marking visible,
clean, and in good working order. Replace or repair
lighting and marking that has been damaged or lost. An
implement safety lighting kit is available from your John

TS951 —UN—12APR90
Deere dealer.

DX,FLASH -19-07JUL99-1/1

Operate the Hazard Warning Light Switch

Operate hazard warning lights when driving on roadways;
do this at switch (A).

LX1043843 —UN—21AUG07
Hazard warning light switch (tractors with cab)

LX1043844 —UN—21AUG07

Hazard warning light switch (tractors without cab)

OU12401,00017F4 -19-20AUG07-1/1

20-5 021412

PN=47
 Lights

Switches for Turn Signal Lights and Horn

(Tractors with Cab)
A—Switch for turn signal lights 2— Right-hand turn signal
and horn 3— Horn (push towards

LX1043845 —UN—21AUG07
1— Left-hand turn signal steering column)

OU12401,00017F5 -19-20AUG07-1/1

Switches for Turn Signal Lights and Horn

(Tractors without Cab)
Positions of switch (A):
• 1 = Turn signal, left-hand turn

LX1042960 —UN—26JUL07
• 2 = Turn signal, right-hand turn
Switch (B) is for the horn.

LX1042961 —UN—30MAY07
OU12401,000175E -19-28MAY07-1/1

20-6 021412

PN=48
 Lights

Seven-Terminal Trailer Socket

Socket (A) allows lights, turn signals and other electrical
equipment on a trailer or implement to be connected.
Always use additional lighting on a mounted implement if
this conceals the turn signals and other lights at the rear

LX1043846 —UN—21AUG07
of the tractor.
NOTE: Suitable plugs can be obtained from your
John Deere dealer.
Connection Function Color of wire
1 Ground Black
2 — —
3 L.h. turn signal Dark green
4 Accessories Red
5 R.h. turn signal Purple
6 Tail lights Gray
7 Accessories Red

RW21249 —UN—17JUN92
OU12401,00017F6 -19-20AUG07-1/1

20-7 021412

PN=49
 Open Operator's Station and Cab
Roll-Over Protective Structure (ROPS)

CAUTION: A roll-over protective structure

(ROPS) is incorporated into each operator's
cab. On this construction do not under any

LX1026209 —UN—16MAY01
circumstances modify structural members by
welding on additional parts, drilling holes, cutting
or grinding etc. Disregarding this instruction
will affect the rigidity of the ROPS.
A tractor roll-over places a severe strain
on the ROPS. Therefore, replace the ROPS
immediately if structural members have been
bent, buckled or otherwise damaged.

OU12401,00012AE -19-22AUG05-1/1

Operate the Foldable ROPS

CAUTION: If the tractor is ever operated for a

short time with the ROPS folded (e.g. to enter a
low building), drive with extreme caution. Do NOT

LX1043847 —UN—23AUG07
wear the seat belt with the ROPS lowered.
Fold the ROPS up again as soon as the tractor
is operated under normal conditions.

Slacken cap screws (A) on both sides. Take out the

quick-release pins (B) at both sides, and remove pins (C)
at both sides. Use handle (D) to lower the ROPS carefully
to the rear.
Secure the ROPS at both sides with pins (C) and
quick-release pins (B).

A—Screws C—Pins

LX1043848 —UN—23AUG07
B—Quick-release pins D—Handle

OU12401,00017F8 -19-20AUG07-1/1

Seat Belt
CAUTION: When driving tractors, always
wear the seat belt.
LX1036221 —UN—02JUN05

OU12401,000121B -19-11AUG11-1/1

25-1 021412

PN=50
 Open Operator's Station and Cab

Avoid Contact with Agricultural Chemicals

CAUTION: This enclosed cab does not protect

against inhaling vapor, aerosol or dust.

1. When operating in an environment where pesticides

TS220 —UN—23AUG88
are present, wear a long-sleeved shirt, long-legged
pants, shoes, and socks.
2. If pesticide use instructions require respiratory
protection, wear an appropriate respirator inside the
cab.
3. Wear personal protective equipment as required
by the pesticide use instructions when leaving the
enclosed cab:
• into a treated area
• to work with contaminated application equipment
such as nozzles which must be cleaned, changed
or redirected

TS272 —UN—23AUG88
• to become involved with mixing and loading activities
4. Before re-entering the cab, remove protective
equipment and store either outside the cab in a closed
box or some other type of sealable container or inside
the cab in a pesticide resistant container, such as a
plastic bag.
5. Clean your shoes or boots to remove soil or other
contaminated particles prior to entering the cab.
DX,CABS1 -19-25MAR09-1/1

Clean Vehicle of Hazardous Pesticides

CAUTION: During application of hazardous 1. Sweep or vacuum the floor of cab.

pesticides, pesticide residue can build up
on the inside or outside of the vehicle. 2. Clean headliners and inside cowlings of cab.
Clean vehicle according to use instructions 3. Wash entire exterior of vehicle.
of hazardous pesticides.
4. Dispose of any wash water with hazardous
When exposed to hazardous pesticides, clean exterior and concentrations of active or non-active ingredients
interior of vehicle daily to keep free of the accumulation of according to published regulations or directives.
visible dirt and contamination.
DX,CABS2 -19-24JUL01-1/1

25-2 021412

PN=51
 Open Operator's Station and Cab

Comfort Seat
To adjust the seat upward, raise it until it clicks into place
(maximum of 3 detent positions). To adjust downward,
raise the seat to the stop position and then lower it.

LX1042967 —UN—30MAY07
Adjust fore/aft spring:
• Lever (C) to the front - no fore/aft suspension
• Lever (C) to the rear - fore/aft suspension
IMPORTANT: Shut off engine before swivelling the
seat. Accidental contact with the controls could
cause the tractor or implement to operate.

If the seat is equipped with a swivel (optional equipment),

this is operated using lever (D) as follows:
Lifting the lever up allows the seat to turn 15° to the left
and right. The seat can be locked at 7.5° intervals.

LX1042968 —UN—30MAY07
To lower the armrest by 30°, press the armrest tilt adjuster
(F) into the armrest.

A—Crank for adjusting E—Backrest tilt adjustment

operator's weight F— Armrest tilt adjustment
B—Fore-and-aft adjustment G—Lumbar support
1
C—Lever for fore/aft spring adjustment
1
D—Lever for swivel

1
If equipped
OU12401,0001763 -19-03JUL07-1/1

25-3 021412

PN=52
 Open Operator's Station and Cab

Air Comfort Seat

1. Adjust weight
There must be weight on the seat for it to be adjusted
to suit the weight of the operator. Start the engine,

LX1033625 —UN—19APR04
allow the seat to settle, then pull lever (C) up briefly.
The seat adjusts itself automatically to the weight of
the operator.
2. Adjust height
After the weight adjustment has been made, the seat
can be adjusted to any height. To adjust the height,
pull lever (C) upward as high as it will go or push it
down. If the top or bottom limit is reached during
height adjustment, automatic height adjustment takes
place to ensure a minimum amount of travel up and
down (suspension).

LX1033626 —UN—19APR04
3. Adjust fore/aft spring
• Lever (B) to the front - No fore/aft suspension
• Lever (B) to the rear - Fore/aft suspension
Adjust swivel
IMPORTANT: Shut off engine before swivelling the
seat. Accidental contact with the controls could
cause the tractor or implement to operate.
A—Fore-and-aft adjustment E—Backrest tilt
The seat swivel is operated by means of lever (D) as B—Lever for fore/aft F— Armrest tilt adjustment
follows: suspension G—Lumbar support
C—Height adjustment adjustment
Lifting the lever up allows the seat to turn 15° to the left D—Lever for swivel movement
and right. The seat can be locked at 7.5° intervals.
Adjust the armrests
To lower the armrest through 30°, press the armrest tilt
adjuster (F) into the armrest.
OU12401,00019D2 -19-08MAY08-1/1

Instructional Seat
CAUTION: This instructional seat must be used
for training or diagnostic purposes only.
Keep all other riders off the tractor and equipment.

LX1036627 —UN—25AUG05
Always use the seat belt.

Press lock (A).

Continued on next page OU12401,00013C1 -19-12JUN06-1/4

25-4 021412

PN=53
 Open Operator's Station and Cab

Tip instructional seat forward.

LX1036628 —UN—25AUG05
OU12401,00013C1 -19-12JUN06-2/4

Rotate seat 90°.

LX1036629 —UN—25AUG05
OU12401,00013C1 -19-12JUN06-3/4

Tip seat backward. Make sure that pin (B) engages in

the appropriate bore.

LX1036630 —UN—25AUG05

OU12401,00013C1 -19-12JUN06-4/4

25-5 021412

PN=54
 Open Operator's Station and Cab

Open Windows
Normal cab
The side and rear windows can all be opened for better
ventilation.

LX1019735 —UN—08FEB00
LX1019360 —UN—15MAY98
OU12401,00017F7 -19-20AUG07-1/2

Low-clearance cab
On this cab, only the rear window can be opened.
To open the window partially, turn lever (A) through
approx. 90 degrees and insert the pin in hole (B).

LX1027104 —UN—15FEB02
OU12401,00017F7 -19-20AUG07-2/2

25-6 021412

PN=55
 Open Operator's Station and Cab

Wiper and Washer System

Windshield wiper switch (A) has three positions:
• 1 = off
• 2 = Slow wipe

LX1043849 —UN—17SEP07
• 3 = Fast wipe
• 4 = not used
The windshield washer system is operated using switch
(A) (push towards steering column).
Rear window wiper switch (B) has three positions:
• 1 = off
• 2 = Slow wipe
• 3 = Fast wipe
The window washer system is operated using switch (B)
(push the switch).

LX1043850 —UN—23AUG07
Add a suitable anti-freeze solution to water in reservoir
(C) to prevent damage to the system if temperatures drop
below freezing point.

A—Windshield wiper switch C—Windshield washer

B—Rear window wiper switch reservoir

LX1042972 —UN—03JUL07
OU12401,00019CD -19-07MAY08-1/1

25-7 021412

PN=56
 Open Operator's Station and Cab

Fan and Air Louvers

The four fan speeds are controlled by switch (A). The
general direction of the airflow can be altered using switch
(B).

LX1042592 —UN—03JUL07
De-icing or de-fogging the windshield
Set the heater to maximum heat output. Set switch (B) to
symbol (D) and turn switch (A) (fan) to position 4.
If the airflow is to be directed at the operator, set switch
(B) to symbol (E). Turn on the fan at switch (A). The
direction and force of the airflow can be further adjusted
at louvers (C).
If the airflow is to be directed evenly around the cab, set
switch (B) to symbol (F). Turn on the fan at switch (A).
If the airflow is to be directed into the footwell, set switch
(B) to symbol (G). Turn on the fan at switch (A).

LX1042593 —UN—03JUL07
Direction of airflow
Positions of switch (B):
• Symbol (D) = air flows to windshield
• Symbol (E) = air flows to operator
• Symbol (F) = air flows to windows, operator and footwell
• Symbol (G) = air flows to footwell

LX007940 —UN—15AUG94
OULXE59,00108E3 -19-01FEB07-1/1

Heating System
Heating is infinitely variable by means of the heater
control. To increase heating, turn control knob clockwise.
Set the fan and louvers as desired.
LX1042594 —UN—03JUL07

OULXE59,00108E4 -19-01FEB07-1/1

25-8 021412

PN=57
 Open Operator's Station and Cab

Air Conditioning System

Turn on air conditioning system at switch (A). Regulate
the cooling effect at control (B). The cooling effect is
increased by turning the knob further counterclockwise.
Set the fan and louvers as desired.

LX1042595 —UN—03JUL07
IMPORTANT: To maintain consistently high
performance, turn on the air-conditioning
system for two or three minutes every month,
regardless of weather conditions or season
(with engine at low idle). Control (B) should
be set for maximum cooling.
At ambient temperatures below 4°C (39°F),
the cab should first be heated (using the A—Air conditioning switch 1— "Winter" position
heating system) so that the temperature inside B—Cooling effect regulator 2— "Summer" position
the cab is as high as possible. 0— Air-conditioning off

NOTE: In position (1) of switch (A) the air conditioning

system can be operated regardless of ambient
temperature. In position (2) the air-conditioning
system can only be operated at temperatures
above 18°C (64°F).
OULXE59,00108E5 -19-01FEB07-1/1

Tips On Using the Air-Conditioning System

Preventing the windows from misting up • Turn the temp. control to a “warm” setting or leave it if it
already is at “warm”
NOTE: First check that the condensation drain
is not blocked.
• Keep the blower running for a couple of minutes to dry
out the evaporator core
During the day: In the morning (air-conditioning system was in use the
day before)
Do not blow cold air at the windshield (do not use window
mode while running the air-conditioning system at “max. During the first start-up period
cool”) setting. • Set air-flow to “footwell” - NOT to “window”!
If you feel too cool with the air-conditioning system at its
• Run the blower
“max. cool” setting:
• Turn the temp. control to “max. heating output” (in the
red zone)
• Keep the blower running • If you are not actually driving the tractor, it may help to
• Turn the temperature control to a “less cool” position open the cab door or cab window
• Leave the air-conditioning system on
As soon as hot, dry air comes out the louvers:
If you still feel too cold:
• Keep the blower running • Set air-flow to “window” - this will dehumidify the
windows
• Turn the temp. control to a “warm” setting (in the red
zone) When the windows are clear:
• Leave the air-conditioning system on • Set air-flow and temperature to a comfortable setting
• If windows mist up, slowly turn the temperature control If ambient humidity is high or there is moisture inside the
to a “cooler” position until the windows start to clear
cab
Before you stop the tractor: • Turn the air-conditioning system on (at rocker switch),
• Keep the blower running while keeping the temp. control set to “warm”
• Switch off the air-conditioning system
LX,OMKAB 017527 -19-01OCT98-1/1

25-9 021412

PN=58
 Open Operator's Station and Cab

Dome Light
Dome light (A) remains on all the time switch (B) is set
to position 1. With the switch at position 2, it comes on
whenever the door is opened. It is switched off in position
0.

LX1026126 —UN—16MAY01
Light (C) illuminates the transmission control levers when
the parking lights or headlights are switched on.

OU12401,0000903 -19-01MAY01-1/1

Adjust Steering Wheel

To adjust steering wheel, pull lever (A) upward, move
steering wheel to desired angle and release the lever.
If only the lever is pulled, the steering wheel will rise to its

LX1042596 —UN—03JUL07
highest position.
To adjust steering wheel height, loosen ring (B). Retighten
the ring once the adjustment is completed.

OULXE59,00108E6 -19-01FEB07-1/1

Back-Up Alarm (Optional Equipment)

If the tractor is equipped with this option, an alarm signal
is emitted whenever the tractor drives in reverse.
Switch (A) can be used to turn the alarm off.

LX1043851 —UN—23AUG07
OU12401,00017FA -19-21AUG07-1/1

25-10 021412

PN=59
 Open Operator's Station and Cab

Adjusting the Height of Access Step

The height of access step (A) can be adjusted.
Take out screws (B). Move access step to desired
position. Put screws (B) back in.

LX1036253 —UN—03JUN05
A—Access step B—Screws

OU12401,00012B8 -19-23AUG05-1/1

Installing the Monitor

Attaching the performance monitor and controls
There are several possible locations for attaching monitors
and controls in the cab:
• On the front right post.

LX1043852 —UN—19SEP07

LX1043853 —UN—19SEP07
• On the center posts.
• On the rear posts.
NOTE: Gap between holes at attaching points is 120
mm (4.72 in.) - M10 thread

Take off the relevant trim and turn it over. The positions
where holes may be made are already marked.

LX1043854 —UN—19SEP07

LX1043855 —UN—19SEP07

OU12401,00017FB -19-21AUG07-1/1

25-11 021412

PN=60
 Open Operator's Station and Cab

Electrical Sockets (If Equipped)

Signal socket
Terminal Wire color Description
1 Red Speed determined by radar

LX1036245 —UN—03JUN05
2 Brown Wheel speed
3 Orange Rear PTO speed
4 — —
5 — —
6 Blue Power supply
7 Black Ground
Signal socket in lateral console
The 7-terminal signal socket (A) is protected by a 30-amp
fuse.

A—Signal Socket B—3-Terminal Power Outlet

LX1036634 —UN—24AUG05
Socket

3-terminal socket in rear cab wall

OU12401,0001B99 -19-24AUG10-1/3

3-terminal power outlet socket

Terminals 1 and 2 of 3-terminal power outlet socket (B)
are protected by a 30-amp fuse. Terminal 3 is ground.
Turn key in main (key) switch to the right to supply power

LX1017966 —UN—12JAN98
to terminal 1. Terminal 2 is supplied with power even
when the ignition is switched off.
IMPORTANT: Electrical equipment requiring high
current inputs may be operated, and the use
of multiple power outlets is permitted, but
the supply circuit must never be overloaded.
Remember, total load comprises the sum of
all the current consumers connected to the
on-board circuit at any one time. This also
applies if the consumers are connected to the
on-board circuit at different sockets.
Continued on next page OU12401,0001B99 -19-24AUG10-2/3

25-12 021412

PN=61
 Open Operator's Station and Cab

Routing the cables

The rear window of the cab is provided with two openings,
allowing the cables to be routed. Open the window and
take out the rubber stoppers. Cut the rubber stoppers at
the incisions provided to enable the cables to be routed.

LX1026097 —UN—09MAR01
Connect the connectors, insert the rubber stoppers and
close the window.

OU12401,0001B99 -19-24AUG10-3/3

Multiple Power-Outlet Socket Strip (If

Equipped)
A strip of extra sockets may be installed on the front of the
switch console. Terminal A on the socket strip is protected
by a 30-amp fuse. Terminal C is protected by a 30-amp

LX1036247 —UN—24APR06
fuse, and terminal B is ground.
Turn key in main (key) switch to the right to supply power
to terminal C. Terminal A is supplied with power even
when the ignition is switched off.
IMPORTANT: Electrical equipment requiring high
current inputs may be operated, and the use
of multiple power outlets is permitted, but
the supply circuit must never be overloaded. applies if the consumers are connected to the
Remember, total load comprises the sum of on-board circuit at different sockets.
all the current consumers connected to the
on-board circuit at any one time. This also
OU12401,0001B9A -19-24AUG10-1/1

25-13 021412

PN=62
 Open Operator's Station and Cab

Service ADVISOR™ Socket

This socket is suitable only for service and diagnostic
purposes. Do not connect any other equipment.

LX1033597 —UN—13FEB04
LX1033598 —UN—09MAR04
SERVICE ADVISOR is a trademark of Deere & Company
OU12401,00017FE -19-21AUG07-1/1

25-14 021412

PN=63
 Open Operator's Station and Cab

Roof Hatch
The roof hatch can be opened and closed by means of
lever (A).
If the roof hatch is equipped with a glass panel, direct

LX1033620 —UN—14APR04
sunlight can be prevented from entering by using cover (B).
The roof hatch can be adjusted to a narrower or wider
angle. To adjust the angle, remove retaining clip (C), pull
gas spring from its retainer and remove retainer. Install
retainer in the desired position (D) or (E), re-install gas
spring to retainer and secure with the clip.

A—Locking lever D—Narrow angle

B—Cover E—Wide angle
C—Retaining clip

LX1033621 —UN—14APR04
LX1033622 —UN—14APR04
OU12401,0001095 -19-13APR04-1/1

25-15 021412

PN=64
 Break-in Period
After the First 4 and 8 Hours of Operation
Tighten rear wheel retaining bolts/nuts

A—500 Nm (370 lb-ft) C—230 Nm (170 lb-ft)

B—250 Nm (185 lb-ft)

LX1029238 —UN—05MAY03

LX001297 —UN—12AUG94
LX1048571 —UN—08DEC09
OU12401,0001D8C -19-08DEC09-1/3

Tighten front wheel retaining bolts/nuts

A—250 Nm (185 lb-ft) C—250 Nm (185 lb-ft)

B—300 Nm (220 lb-ft)

LX1029249 —UN—24APR03
LX000558 —UN—12AUG94

Continued on next page OU12401,0001D8C -19-08DEC09-2/3

30-1 021412

PN=65
 Break-in Period

Adjustable front axle

Tighten mounting screws (A) to 400 Nm (300 lb-ft).

LX000560 —UN—09AUG94
OU12401,0001D8C -19-08DEC09-3/3

Within the First 100 Hours of Operation

Wheel bolts
The first oil and filter change must take place after the first
Check torque at wheel retaining bolts frequently. 100 operating hours at the earliest but within the first 500
operating hours at the latest.
Engine oil
For the correct use of engine oil, see Section 80, FUEL,
LUBRICANTS, HYDRAULIC OIL AND COOLANT.
OU12401,00019C8 -19-11AUG11-1/1

After the First 100 Hours of Operation

The service jobs listed under “After the First 100 Hours”
in Section 85, “Lubrication and Periodic Service” must be
carried out.
OU12401,00019C9 -19-06MAY08-1/1

30-2 021412

PN=66
 Prestarting Checks
Prestarting Checks
Engine oil level
Engine oil level should always be between the marks on
the dipstick. Do not start the engine if oil level is below

LX1042910 —UN—10APR07
lower mark on dipstick.

LX1041430 —UN—17NOV06
After long storage period
Check whether dirt or other foreign bodies have collected
under the hood or cab. If so, remove them.

Continued on next page OU12401,0001801 -19-21AUG07-1/2

35-1 021412

PN=67
 Prestarting Checks

Fuel filter
If water or sediment deposits have settled in filter, proceed
as follows:
1. Open bleed screw (A).

LX1042911 —UN—10APR07
2. Open drain plug (B) by 3/4 of a turn. Retighten the
plug as soon as water and sediment deposits have
drained out.
3. Open drain plug (C) by 3/4 of a turn. Retighten the
plug as soon as water and sediment deposits have
drained out.
4. Tighten bleed screw (A).
5. Turn key in main switch to the right to the first switch
position so that the fuel transfer pump is operating.
Keep the pump running for approx. 40 seconds.

LX1031622 —UN—23JAN06
If water was present in fuel filter, use a 1/2-inch
square-section key to loosen drain plug (D) under the
fuel tank by one turn. After draining off any water and
sediment deposits, retighten drain plug until hand-tight.

Other checks
If the tractor is used to power external hydraulic equipment,
check the level of the transmission/hydraulic oil every day. A—Bleed screw C—Drain plug
B—Drain plug D—Drain plug (fuel tank)
This check is described in “Service - Every 250 Hours”.
If the tractor is used in particularly wet and muddy terrain,
apply extra lubrication as follows: • Lubricate three-point hitch.
These jobs are described in “Service - Every 250 Hours”
• Lubricate front axle and front-wheel drive shaft. and “Service - Every 500 Hours”.
• Lubricate rear axle.
OU12401,0001801 -19-21AUG07-2/2

Comply with Operator's Manuals of

Implement Manufacturers

CAUTION: Before operating the tractor in

conjunction with a mounted implement or
trailer, it is the responsibility of the operator TS201 —UN—23AUG88
to make himself familiar with the relevant
Operator's Manuals. Operator errors may
have serious consequences.

Operator's Manuals and the safety decals on mounted

implements and trailers provide important information on
how to operate them safely. For this reason, it is important
to make yourself familiar with them before starting work.
Operator's Manuals must be provided for all operators
of the tractor.
OULXBER,0001A5A -19-21FEB11-1/1

35-2 021412

PN=68
 Operating the Engine
Engine Fuel System and Power Rating
Fuel System
Engine Certification/Power Rating
IMPORTANT: Modification or alteration to the
The kW (hp) rating on the engine emissions certification
injection pump, the injection pump timing,
label specifies the gross engine kW (hp), which is flywheel
or the fuel injectors will terminate the
power without fan. In most applications this will not be
warranty to the purchaser.
the same rating as the advertised tractor kW (hp) rating.
Do not attempt to service injection pump or (See Specifications section.)
fuel injectors. Special tools and training are
required. See your John Deere dealer.
OU1092A,0000141 -19-25SEP07-1/1

Important Information Regarding the Engine

The warranty does not cover damage to the engine Unauthorized settings contravene the emissions
and driveline elements caused by unauthorized engine regulations that apply to this engine and may result in
settings. criminal prosecution.
OU12401,000198A -19-25JAN08-1/1

Positions of Main (Key) Switch

A—Power supply with engine C—“On” (engine running)
off D—Start position
B—“Off”

LX1043856 —UN—29OCT07
OU12401,0001802 -19-21AUG07-1/1

40-1 021412

PN=69
 Operating the Engine

Starting the Engine

CAUTION: Never operate the engine in a

closed building. Make sure there is plenty of
ventilation. Danger of asphyxiation!

LX1043889 —UN—18SEP07
1. Set selective control valve levers (A) to neutral position.
2. Move reverser lever (C) into neutral position and
engage park lock.
3. Turn key in main switch (D) one position to the right.
Wait until light (E) goes out.
4. Turn key in main switch (D) clockwise to end position.
As soon as engine starts, release key.
Do not operate starting motor for more than 30 seconds at
a time. Turn key in main switch to zero. Wait at least one
minute before attempting to start again.
After starting the engine, wait 2 seconds before operating

LX1042701 —UN—04JUL07
switches or controls since the electronic system of the
tractor is checked.
IMPORTANT: During the warm-up phase, operate the
tractor at moderate load only. Once operating
temperature has been reached (see temperature
gauge), full power becomes available.

NOTE: The engine control unit (ECU) allows the engine

to run at a higher slow idle speed (1050 rpm) until A—SCV Levers D—Main (Key) Switch
coolant temperature reaches 20°C (68°F). B—Hand Throttle E—Glow-Plug Indicator Light
C—Reverser Lever

OULXE59,0010991 -19-17JUN10-1/1

Cold-Weather Starting Aid

Depending on tractor equipment, various cold-weather
starting aids are available to assist in starting the engine
at temperatures below 0°C (32°F).

LX1026128 —UN—16MAY01

OU12401,00012C1 -19-28AUG05-1/1

40-2 021412

PN=70
 Operating the Engine

Starting with a Booster Battery

CAUTION: Gas given off by batteries is highly

explosive. Keep sparks and naked flames away
from batteries. Be sure polarity is correct before
making connections: ground cable to negative

LX000399 —UN—26JUL94
pole and starter cable to positive pole of battery.
Reversed polarity will damage the electrical
system. Always connect positive cable first
and then negative cable!

Tractors with Cab

The tractor is equipped with connections to allow an
additional 12-volt battery to be brought into the circuit.
Tractors without Cab
Lift up cover (A), and connect positive poles (B) before
connecting negative poles (C). Remove battery and install a replacement battery. See
Section 85.
OU12401,0001B9B -19-05MAY09-1/1

Fuel Preheater
Fuel preheater (A) switches on and off automatically
(ambient temperature).

LX1036260 —UN—16AUG05
OU12401,0001404 -19-13MAY06-1/1

Coolant Preheater
CAUTION: Avoid electrical shock or fire. Use
3-wire, heavy duty electrical cord with 15-amp
rating (14 gauge) minimum, suitable for outdoor

LX1043857 —UN—23AUG07
use. Always plug electrical cord into 110-volt
outlet protected with ground fault interrupter.

At an ambient temperature of -15°C (5°F), the heating

process takes approx. 2 hours. Extend the heating period
if ambient temperature is lower.

OULXE59,00109D9 -19-09DEC09-1/1

Engines with Turbocharger IMPORTANT: If the engine stalls when in operation,

Most damage to the turbocharger is caused by not restart it IMMEDIATELY. This will prevent the
following the correct procedure when starting and shutting turbocharger from overheating.
off the engine. After starting and before shutting off, idle
the engine without load for at least 30 seconds. See also Stopping the Engine in this Section.
LX,OMMOT 013413 -19-22JUN10-1/1

40-3 021412

PN=71
 Operating the Engine

Engine Protection
Malfunctions in the fuel system and engine are indicated
by the light (see arrow) flashing.
To protect the engine and prevent damage, there is an
engine protection program that functions as follows when
a serious malfunction occurs:

LX1042578 —UN—29MAY07
Malfunction Effect
Incorrect signal from the crankshaft speed sensor Engine power is reduced by 50%
Coolant too hot Engine power is reduced by 20 to 60%
Fuel temperature too high Engine power is reduced by 20%
Mixed air temperature of Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) too high Engine power is reduced by 20 to 60%
Faulty suction control valve Engine power is reduced by 50%
Incorrect signal from sensor for fuel rail pressure Engine power is reduced by 50%
Problem with transmission on the CAN BUS Engine power is reduced in increments of 10% to an engine speed of 1277
rpm
Water detected in fuel Engine power is reduced by 50%

OU12401,0001B22 -19-02FEB09-1/1

Towing the Tractor A disabled tractor is best transported on a flatbed carrier.

IMPORTANT: Never tow the tractor to start the engine! Comply with the instructions in the “Transport” section.
LX,OMOT 004928 -19-01SEP99-1/1

Parking the Tractor

IMPORTANT: Engage park only when the
tractor is stationary.

Engage park and apply park brake when parked or

LX1042703 —UN—04JUL07
operating the tractor from a stationary position.

OULXE59,00109DA -19-09DEC09-1/1

40-4 021412

PN=72
 Operating the Engine

Stopping the Engine

CAUTION: Do NOT shut off the engine while the

tractor is moving (not even when it is rolling to
a stop). To do so could damage the electronics

LX1042704 —UN—04JUL07
as well as the transmission.

CAUTION: After heavy-duty work or driving at

high engine speeds, do not shut off the engine
immediately; wait for a few minutes with the
engine running at slow idle speed. This prevents
the engine compartment from becoming too hot.

CAUTION: Lower mounted implement(s) or Stop the tractor, engage the park lock and then turn main
equipment to the ground before leaving the (key) switch (A) to the left to shut off the engine.
tractor. Pull the key out of the main switch.
OU12401,0001804 -19-22JUN10-1/1

40-5 021412

PN=73
 Operating the Tractor
Reduce Fuel Consumption
Service correctly
Replace air cleaner element and fuel, engine oil and

LX1031683 —UN—27MAR03
transmission/hydraulic filter elements at specified service
intervals (see “Service” section).
Use only John Deere filters!

OULXE59,00108ED -19-01FEB07-1/7

Use recommended oils and lubricants only (see “Fuel,

Lubricants, Hydraulic Oil and Coolant” section).

L103642 —UN—15AUG94
OULXE59,00108ED -19-01FEB07-2/7

Have the fuel system checked regularly by your John

Deere dealer.

LX1029227 —UN—07MAY03

Continued on next page OULXE59,00108ED -19-01FEB07-3/7

45-1 021412

PN=74
 Operating the Tractor

Have draft link control functions of the hitch checked

regularly by your John Deere dealer.

LX1026059 —UN—18MAY01
OULXE59,00108ED -19-01FEB07-4/7

Drive with correct tire pressures

Adapt tire pressures to type of work and ground conditions
(consult your John Deere dealer or local tire agent).

L103645 —UN—15AUG94
OULXE59,00108ED -19-01FEB07-5/7

Choose correct ballast

Choose ballast to obtain 10 to 15% wheel slip. Use no
more ballast than necessary, reduce ballast for light work.

A—Too much ballast C—Correct ballast

B—Too little ballast
LX009185 —UN—01SEP94

LX009186 —UN—01SEP94

Continued on next page OULXE59,00108ED -19-01FEB07-6/7

45-2 021412

PN=75
 Operating the Tractor

Select correct gear

Always drive in the highest possible gear with reduced
engine speed.
Choose a gear so that engine speed (A) with engine
under no load drops 150 to 250 rpm when the tractor is

LX1042705 —UN—04JUL07
operating with the engine under load (B).
NOTE: For light work, reduce engine speed below 2000
rpm. Select a gear so that engine speed drops
200 to 300 rpm when operating.

OULXE59,00108ED -19-01FEB07-7/7

Select Correct Ground Travel Speed

Number of gears on tractors with: • 24 forward gears, 24 reverse gears
SyncroPlus™ transmission (30 km/h; 18.5 mph): In addition, the tractor may be equipped with a creeper
• 12 forward gears, 4 reverse gears transmission that provides additional 9 gears (SyncroPlus
transmission) or 12 gears (PowrQuad transmission).
PowrReverser transmission (30 km/h; 18.5 mph):
• 16 forward gears, 16 reverse gears Gears should be selected so as to avoid prolonged
overloading of the engine. Ground travel speeds with
PowrQuad™ transmission (30 km/h; 18.5 mph): engine running at rated speed are shown on the following
• 16 forward gears, 16 reverse gears pages.
PowrQuad transmission (40 km/h; 25 mph):
SyncroPlus is a trademark of Deere & Company.
PowrQuad is a trademark of Deere & Company.
OU12401,0001805 -19-21AUG07-1/1

Travel Speed Tables

NOTE: The ground travel speeds shown in the following make of tire, wheel slip etc. If the precise speed
tables are theoretical. The actual speeds vary is required for specific applications, then it must
with rolling circumference, load, tire pressure, be obtained by measurement.
OULXE59,001089F -19-08MAY06-1/1

Changing Tires
When changing tires, always refer to the tables below and provided under “Tire Combinations” and “Check the Oil
select tires that have the same differential gear pair (e.g. Sight-Glass” in Section 65, “Wheel Tread, Tires”.
51/9) listed next to them. Also comply with the information
OU12401,0001708 -19-01APR07-1/1

45-3 021412

PN=76
 Operating the Tractor

Travel Speeds, SyncroPlus Transmission (12/4)

30 km/h (18.5 mph); rated engine speed 2300 rpm; 18.4R38 tires; differential 51/9
Additional gears with creeper transmission
Range Gear km/h mph Range Gear km/h mph

A 1 2,6 1.6 A 1 0,26 0.16

2 3,6 2.2 2 0,36 0.22
3 4,5 3.0 3 0,46 0.29
B 1 5,1 3.2 B 1 0,52 0.32
2 7,1 4.4 2 0,72 0.45
3 9,1 5.7 3 0,91 0.57
C 1 8,4 5.2 C 1 0,85 0.53
2 11,7 7.3 2 1,18 0.73
3 14,9 9.3 3 1,50 0.93
D 1 17,4 10.8
2 24,2 15.0
3 30,8 19.1
A R 3,1 1.9 A R 0,31 0.19
B R 6,3 3.9 B R 0,63 0.39
C R 10,3 6.4 C R 1,03 0.64
D R 21,2 13.2

Other tires (supplied by factory):

Tires Speed Differential Tires Speed Differential
21.5L-16.1 23.4% slower 47/10 480/70R34 2.9% slower 53/10
16.9-24 8.8% slower 47/10 520/70R34 0.3% faster 53/10
420/85R24 8.8% slower 47/10 13.6R38 2.9% slower 53/10
18.4-26 1.3% slower 47/10 14.9R38 0.3% faster 53/10
16.9R30 9.4% slower 53/10 16.9R38 3.2% slower 51/9
18.4R30 6.2% slower 53/10 340/85R38 2.9% slower 53/10
420/85R30 9.4% slower 53/10 420/85R38 3.2% slower 51/9
460/85R30 6.2% slower 53/10 460/85R38 same 51/9
16.9R34 (SRI 730) 5.5% slower 53/10 480/70R38 3.2% slower 51/9
16.9R34 (SRI 750) 2.9% slower 53/10 520/70R38 same 51/9
18.4R34 0.3% faster 53/10 600/65R38 same 51/9
420/85R34 2.9% slower 53/10 320/90R42 3.2% slower 51/9
460/85R34 0.3% faster 53/10 13.6-46 5.8% faster 51/9

OULXE59,001097A -19-29NOV08-1/1

45-4 021412

PN=77
 Operating the Tractor

Travel Speeds, PowrReverser Transmission (16/16)

30 km/h (18.5 mph); rated engine speed 2300 rpm; 18.4R38 tires; differential 51/9
Additional gears with creeper transmission
Range Gear km/h mph Range Gear km/h mph

A 1 2,0 1.2 A 1 0,20 0.12

2 2,6 1.6 2 0,26 0.16
3 3,6 2.2 3 0,36 0.22
4 4,5 2.8 4 0,46 0.29
B 1 4,0 2.5 B 1 0,40 0.25
2 5,1 3.2 2 0,52 0.32
3 7,1 4.4 3 0,72 0.45
4 9,1 5.7 4 0,91 0.57
C 1 6,5 4.0 C 1 0,65 0.40
2 8,4 5.2 2 0,85 0.53
3 11,7 7.3 3 1,18 0.73
4 14,9 9.3 4 1,50 0.93
D 1 13,4 8.3
2 17,4 10.8
3 24,2 15.0
4 30,8 19.1
A R1 2,1 1.3 A R1 0,21 0.13
R2 2,7 1.7 R2 0,27 0.17
R3 3,7 2.3 R3 0,37 0.23
R4 4,7 2.9 R4 0,48 0.30
B R1 4,1 2.5 B R1 0,41 0.25
R2 5,4 3.4 R2 0,54 0.34
R3 7,4 4.6 R3 0,75 0.47
R4 9,5 5.9 R4 0,95 0.59
C R1 6,8 4.2 C R1 0,68 0.42
R2 8,8 5.5 R2 0,89 0.55
R3 12,2 7.6 R3 1,23 0.76
R4 15,6 9.7 R4 1,57 0.98
D R1 14,0 8.7
R2 18,2 11.3
R3 25,2 15.7
R4 32,1 19.9

Other tires (supplied by factory):

Tires Speed Differential Tires Speed Differential
21.5L-16.1 23.4% slower 47/10 480/70R34 2.9% slower 53/10
16.9-24 8.8% slower 47/10 520/70R34 0.3% faster 53/10
420/85R24 8.8% slower 47/10 13.6R38 2.9% slower 53/10
18.4-26 1.3% slower 47/10 14.9R38 0.3% faster 53/10
16.9R30 9.4% slower 53/10 16.9R38 3.2% slower 51/9
18.4R30 6.2% slower 53/10 340/85R38 2.9% slower 53/10
420/85R30 9.4% slower 53/10 420/85R38 3.2% slower 51/9
460/85R30 6.2% slower 53/10 460/85R38 same 51/9
16.9R34 (SRI 730) 5.5% slower 53/10 480/70R38 3.2% slower 51/9
16.9R34 (SRI 750) 2.9% slower 53/10 520/70R38 same 51/9
18.4R34 0.3% faster 53/10 600/65R38 same 51/9

Continued on next page OULXE59,001097B -19-29NOV08-1/2

45-5 021412

PN=78
 Operating the Tractor

Other tires (supplied by factory):

Tires Speed Differential Tires Speed Differential
420/85R34 2.9% slower 53/10 320/90R42 3.2% slower 51/9
460/85R34 0.3% faster 53/10 13.6-46 5.8% faster 51/9
OULXE59,001097B -19-29NOV08-2/2

Shift SyncroPlus™ Transmission /

PowrReverser Transmission
The transmission is shifted via range shift lever (A)
and gear shift lever (B). An additional control on the
PowrReverser transmission is the mechanical or electrical

LX1017769 —UN—09OCT97
reverser lever (C).
IMPORTANT: Engage park only when the
tractor is stationary.

NOTE: After the engine has been started, wait for 5

seconds before moving gear shift lever (B) or
reverser lever (C) out of neutral position. SyncroPlus transmission

Optimum gear-shifting for driving under load

(transport):
1. Select a range suitable for driving under load.
2. Engage the first gear.
3. Drive and shift up through the ranges until the top

LX1042982 —UN—06JUL07
range is reached.
4. Shift up through the gears.
Cold-weather operation
If the oil is cold (0°C, 32°F), it may affect how the reverser
lever operates. At temperatures below -10°C (14°F), it
may take longer to change the direction of travel. Below PowrReverser transmission
+5°C (41°F), the automatic engine-speed matching is
de-activated.
In certain circumstances, the reverser lever may have
to be actuated several times before the tractor starts to
move. When the oil has had time to warm up, operation

LX1042983 —UN—06JUL07
becomes normal again.
"Come-home" mode
Under certain circumstances, the tractor can still be driven
in “come-home” mode even if there is an electrical fault in
the transmission.
To do this, stop the engine, remove plug K10/2 (relay box PowrReverser transmission, reverser lever
K10) and re-install it at a position 90° from its original
position. The wording “Come Home” must be at top.
A—Range shift lever C—Reverser lever
NOTE: In the come-home mode, engine speed is B—Gear shift lever
limited to 1500 rpm and only the first gear
in each range is available.
SyncroPlus is a trademark of Deere & Company.
Continued on next page OU12401,0001770 -19-04JUL07-1/2

45-6 021412

PN=79
 Operating the Tractor

Cruise control (if equipped)

Maximum engine speed can be limited for PTO operation
by means of cruise control (A). Move the hand throttle
lever to full throttle, then reduce engine speed at control
knob (A).

LX1042984 —UN—06JUL07
In the lowest setting, engine speed is limited to 1400 rpm.
In the highest setting, the engine can run at maximum
speed. Individual engine speed limits can be set between
these two positions.
If no PTO operation is taking place, cruise control (A)
should be in its maximum speed position or in the “Off”
position.
OU12401,0001770 -19-04JUL07-2/2

45-7 021412

PN=80
 Operating the Tractor

Travel Speeds, PowrQuad Transmission (16/16)

30 km/h (18.5 mph); rated engine speed 2300 rpm; 18.4R38 tires; differential 51/9
Additional gears with creeper transmission
Range Gear km/h mph Range Gear km/h mph

A 1 2,6 1.6 A 1 0,26 0.16

2 3,1 1.9 2 0,31 0.19
3 3,7 2.3 3 0,37 0.23
4 4,5 2.8 4 0,46 0.29
B 1 5,1 3.2 B 1 0,52 0.32
2 6,2 3.9 2 0,62 0.39
3 7,4 4.6 3 0,75 0.47
4 9,1 5.7 4 0,91 0.57
C 1 8,5 5.3 C 1 0,85 0.53
2 10,2 6.3 2 1,02 0.63
3 12,2 7.6 3 1,23 0.76
4 14,9 9.3 4 1,50 0.93
D 1 17,4 10.8
2 21,0 13.0
3 25,1 15.6
4 30,8 19.1
A R1 2,7 1.7 A R1 0,27 0.17
R2 3,2 2.0 R2 0,32 0.20
R3 3,9 2.4 R3 0,39 0.24
R4 4,7 2.9 R4 0,48 0.30
B R1 5,4 3.4 B R1 0,54 0.34
R2 6,5 4.0 R2 0,65 0.40
R3 7,7 4.8 R3 0,78 0.48
R4 9,5 5.9 R4 0,95 0.59
C R1 8,8 5.5 C R1 0,89 0.55
R2 10,6 6.6 R2 1,07 0.66
R3 12,7 7.9 R3 1,28 0.80
R4 15,6 9.7 R4 1,57 0.98
D R1 18,2 11.3
R2 21,9 13.6
R3 26,2 16.3
R4 32,1 19.9

Other tires (supplied by factory):

Tires Speed Differential Tires Speed Differential
21.5L-16.1 23.4% slower 47/10 480/70R34 2.9% slower 53/10
16.9-24 8.8% slower 47/10 520/70R34 0.3% faster 53/10
420/85R24 8.8% slower 47/10 13.6R38 2.9% slower 53/10
18.4-26 1.3% slower 47/10 14.9R38 0.3% faster 53/10
16.9R30 9.4% slower 53/10 16.9R38 3.2% slower 51/9
18.4R30 6.2% slower 53/10 340/85R38 2.9% slower 53/10
420/85R30 9.4% slower 53/10 420/85R38 3.2% slower 51/9
460/85R30 6.2% slower 53/10 460/85R38 same 51/9
16.9R34 (SRI 730) 5.5% slower 53/10 480/70R38 3.2% slower 51/9
16.9R34 (SRI 750) 2.9% slower 53/10 520/70R38 same 51/9
18.4R34 0.3% faster 53/10 600/65R38 same 51/9

Continued on next page OULXE59,001097C -19-29NOV08-1/2

45-8 021412

PN=81
 Operating the Tractor

Other tires (supplied by factory):

Tires Speed Differential Tires Speed Differential
420/85R34 2.9% slower 53/10 320/90R42 3.2% slower 51/9
460/85R34 0.3% faster 53/10 13.6-46 5.8% faster 51/9
OULXE59,001097C -19-29NOV08-2/2

45-9 021412

PN=82
 Operating the Tractor

Travel Speeds, PowrQuad Transmission (24/24)

40 km/h (25 mph); rated engine speed 2300 rpm; 18.4R38 tires; differential 51/9
Additional gears with creeper transmission
Range Gear km/h mph Range Gear km/h mph

A 1 1,6 1.0 A 1 0,16 0.10

2 1,9 1.2 2 0,19 0.12
3 2,3 1.4 3 0,23 0.14
4 2,8 1.7 4 0,28 0.17
B 1 3,9 2.4 B 1 0,39 0.24
2 4,7 2.9 2 0,47 0.29
3 5,6 3.5 3 0,56 0.35
4 6,8 4.2 4 0,69 0.43
C 1 6,3 3.9 C 1 0,63 0.39
2 7,6 4.7 2 0,76 0.47
3 9,1 5.7 3 0,91 0.57
4 11,2 7.0 4 1,12 0.70
D 1 10,4 6.5
2 12,5 7.8
3 14,9 9.3
4 18,3 11.4
E 1 16,8 10.4
2 20,3 12.6
3 24,3 15.1
4 29,8 18.5
F 1 22,7 14.1
2 27,4 17.0
3 32,8 20.4
4 40,2 25.0
A R1 1,7 1.1 A R1 0,17 0.11
R2 2,0 1.2 R2 0,20 0.12
R3 2,4 1.5 R3 0,24 0.15
R4 2,9 1.8 R4 0,29 0.18
B R1 4,0 2.5 B R1 0,41 0.25
R2 4,9 3.0 R2 0,49 0.30
R3 5,8 3.6 R3 0,59 0.37
R4 7,1 4.4 R4 0,72 0.45
C R1 6,6 4.1 C R1 0,66 0.41
R2 7,9 4.9 R2 0,80 0.50
R3 9,5 5.9 R3 0,95 0.59
R4 11,6 7.2 R4 1,17 0.73
D R1 10,8 6.7
R2 13,0 8.1
R3 15,6 9.87
R4 19,1 11.9
E R1 17,6 10.9
R2 21,2 13.2
R3 25,3 15.7
R4 31,0 19.3
F R1 23,7 14.7
R2 28,6 17.8

Continued on next page OULXE59,001097D -19-29NOV08-1/2

45-10 021412

PN=83
 Operating the Tractor

40 km/h (25 mph); rated engine speed 2300 rpm; 18.4R38 tires; differential 51/9
Additional gears with creeper transmission
Range Gear km/h mph Range Gear km/h mph

R3 34,2 21.3
R4 41,9 26.0

Other tires (supplied by factory):

Tires Speed Differential Tires Speed Differential
21.5L-16.1 23.4% slower 47/10 480/70R34 3.0% slower 53/10
16.9-24 8.7% slower 47/10 520/70R34 0.2% faster 53/10
420/85R24 8.7% slower 47/10 13.6R38 3.0% slower 53/10
18.4-26 1.5% slower 47/10 14.9R38 0.2% faster 53/10
16.9R30 9.5% slower 53/10 16.9R38 3.2% slower 51/9
18.4R30 6.2% slower 53/10 340/85R38 3.0% slower 53/10
420/85R30 9.5% slower 53/10 420/85R38 3.2% slower 51/9
460/85R30 6.2% slower 53/10 460/85R38 same 51/9
16.9R34 (SRI 730) 5.5% slower 53/10 480/70R38 3.2% slower 51/9
16.9R34 (SRI 750) 3.0% slower 53/10 520/70R38 same 51/9
18.4R34 0.2% faster 53/10 600/65R38 same 51/9
420/85R34 3.0% slower 53/10 320/90R42 3.2% slower 51/9
460/85R34 0.2% faster 53/10 13.6-46 6.0% faster 51/9
OULXE59,001097D -19-29NOV08-2/2

Shift the PowrQuad Transmission

Gears are shifted using range shift lever (A), gear shift
lever (B) and reverser lever (C).
NOTE: Once the engine has started, wait for 5

LX1043858 —UN—23AUG07
seconds before moving reverser lever (C)
out of neutral position.

The clutch pedal must be depressed to change the

ranges. There is no need to depress the clutch pedal to
shift gears or to change the direction of travel.

CAUTION: If the reverser lever is actuated when

the engine is running and a range is selected,
the tractor will start to move.

IMPORTANT: Engage park only when the

tractor is stationary.
LX1043859 —UN—23AUG07

Optimum gear-shifting for driving under load

(transport):
1. Select a range suitable for driving under load.
2. Engage the first gear.
3. Drive and shift up through the ranges until the top
range is reached.
4. Shift up through the gears.
A—Range shift lever C—Reverser lever
B—Gear shift lever

OU12401,0001806 -19-22AUG07-1/1

45-11 021412

PN=84
 Operating the Tractor

Shift the PowrQuad Plus Transmission

Gears are shifted using range shift lever (A), gear shift
buttons (B) - or switch (D) - and reverser lever (C). The
gear indicator (E) shows the gear selected.

LX1042988 —UN—06JUL07
Before starting the engine, move reverser lever (C) to
neutral position. To drive, first move range-shift lever (A)
to the desired range and then move the reverser lever to
the desired direction.

CAUTION: If the reverser lever is actuated when

the engine is running and a range is selected,
the tractor will start to move.

The clutch pedal must be depressed to change the ranges.

There is no need to depress the clutch pedal to shift gears
or to change the direction of travel. When changing ranges
at travel speeds at or above approx. 7 km/h (4.4 mph),

LX1042983 —UN—06JUL07
the transmission is automatically shifted into a gear that
matches the travel speed. This automatic function can be
overridden by holding down one of the gear shift buttons.
To park the tractor, move reverser lever (C) to neutral and
engage park at range-shift lever (A).
IMPORTANT: Engage park only when the
tractor is stationary.

A—Range shift lever D—Gear shift switch (extra)

B—Gear shift buttons E—Gear indicator
NOTE: If shift lever (A) is moved to park position when C—Reverser lever
reverser lever (C) is not in neutral, an audible alarm
is triggered and the letter “N” starts to flash. When
the engine is shut off, the reverser lever remains in may take longer to change the direction of travel. Below
its selected position but the transmission shifts into +5°C (41°F), the automatic engine-speed matching is
neutral. If the reverser lever is not in neutral when de-activated.
the engine is started, an audible alarm is triggered
In certain circumstances, the reverser lever may have
and the letter “N” starts to flash to alert the operator.
to be actuated several times before the tractor starts to
If the reverser lever is moved out of neutral while the
move. When the oil has had time to warm up, operation
park lock is engaged, an audible alarm is triggered.
becomes normal again.
To make the tractor move, put the reverser lever in
neutral and then move it to the desired position. "Come-home" mode
Engine-speed matching when shifting gears Under certain circumstances, the tractor can still be driven
in “come-home” mode even if there is an electrical fault in
For a smoother shift, engine speed is temporarily matched the transmission.
by the electronic system. If not desired, this function may
be disabled by the John Deere dealer. To do this, stop the engine, remove plug K10/2 (relay box
K10) and re-install it at a position 90° from its original
Optimum gear-shifting for driving under position. The wording “Come Home” must be at top.
load (transport):
NOTE: In the come-home mode, engine speed is
1. Select a range suitable for driving under load. limited to 1500 rpm and only the first gear
2. Engage the first gear. in each range is available.
3. Drive and shift up through the ranges until the top
range is reached.
4. Shift up through the gears.
Cold-weather operation
If the oil is cold (0°C, 32°F), it may affect how the reverser
lever operates. At temperatures below -10°C (14°F), it
Continued on next page OU12401,0001772 -19-04JUL07-1/2

45-12 021412

PN=85
 Operating the Tractor

Cruise control (if equipped)

Maximum engine speed can be limited for PTO operation
by means of cruise control (A). Move the hand throttle
lever to full throttle, then reduce engine speed at control
knob (A).

LX1042984 —UN—06JUL07
In the lowest setting, engine speed is limited to 1400 rpm.
In the highest setting, the engine can run at maximum
speed. Individual engine speed limits can be set between
these two positions.
If no PTO operation is taking place, cruise control (A)
should be in its maximum speed position or in the “Off”
position.
OU12401,0001772 -19-04JUL07-2/2

Engage the Creeper Transmission

To engage or disengage creeper transmission, depress
clutch pedal.
Select creeper as follows:
1. Select range.

LX1043869 —UN—17SEP07
2. Engage creeper.
Never engage creeper transmission with engine speed
higher than 1000 rpm.
IMPORTANT: Do not use creeper transmission when
working with implements that penetrate the
soil and require high tractive force.

A—Creeper speed B—High speed

OU12401,0001811 -19-23AUG07-1/1

Engage the Front-Wheel Drive

Front-wheel drive can be engaged and disengaged in all
gears (forward and reverse), on-the-go and under load
without using the clutch.
NOTE: Disengage front-wheel drive before driving
LX1042974 —UN—06JUL07

LX002780 —UN—16AUG94
at high speed on public roads.

NOTE: When braking with both brake pedals, front-wheel

drive engages automatically regardless of the
position selected at the front-wheel drive switch.
The front-wheel drive indicator light comes on.

A—Front-wheel drive C—Indicator light comes on

disengaged when front-wheel drive is
B—Front wheel drive engaged engaged

OU12401,0001768 -19-03JUL07-1/1

45-13 021412

PN=86
 Operating the Tractor

Engage the Differential Lock

CAUTION: Do not attempt to turn the tractor

with the differential lock engaged.

LX1042975 —UN—06JUL07
If wheel slip varies greatly between rear wheels, engage
differential lock by means of button (A) (only if the
difference in speed is not too high). To disengage the
differential lock, depress brake pedal or actuate button
(A) again.
If tractor speed exceeds 23,3 km/h (14.5 mph) with the
differential lock engaged, the differential lock switches
off automatically.
When tractor speed drops below 23,3 km/h (14.5 mph)
again, the differential lock must be engaged manually by
the driver.
OU12401,0001769 -19-03JUL07-1/1

Hydraulic Foot Brakes

CAUTION: When the engine is not running, pedal

travel is longer (no hydraulic assistance).

IMPORTANT: Brake pedals must be coupled

LX000357 —UN—12AUG94

LX000295 —UN—12AUG94
together by means of pedal coupler (A)
when driving on public roads.

For field operation, pull pedal coupler (A) outward. The

brake pedals can now be operated individually. In this
case, only the l.h. or r.h. rear wheel is braked. Use
individual brakes to assist in making sharp turns. Use
brake to assist steering at low tractor speeds only.
When stopping the tractor, press down on both brake
pedals at the same time.
When braking with both brake pedals together, front-wheel
drive engages automatically. The front-wheel drive
indicator light comes on.
OULXE59,001066E -19-05AUG04-1/1

45-14 021412

PN=87
 Hitch
Hitch Control
The hitch is controlled by means of hitch control lever (A)
and raise/lower switch (B). The lift height can be limited
by means of the height-limit control (C).

LX1019326 —UN—07APR98
To prepare the hitch for operation, start the engine and
either:
• move control lever (A) to the position that corresponds
to the position of draft links,
• move control lever (A) to one of the end positions, or
• actuate raise/lower switch (B).
Pull control (A) towards “0” to raise implement
Push control (A) towards “9” to lower implement
A—Hitch control lever C—Height-limit control
The implement can be raised and lowered independently B—Raise/lower switch
of control lever (A) by means of raise/lower switch (B).
This is of assistance when turning at the end of a field,
for example. If the upper part of the raise/lower (B) switch adjusted draft force is not active (override function). If
is pressed, the implement is raised as high as the setting raise/lower switch (B) is released, the implement returns
at height-limit control (C). If the lower part of raise/lower to the previous settings.
switch (B) is pressed, the implement is lowered as far as
the setting at control lever (A). This "quick lower" function will only work if:

To obtain working depth quickly in compact soil at the • the implement has been raised using switch (B)
headland (quick lower), keep raise/lower switch (B) • the implement is lowered continuously from raised
pressed. As long as raise/lower switch (B) is pressed, the position using switch (B)
OULXE59,00108F1 -19-15FEB07-1/2

Pull control lever as far as it will go (beyond "0") - hitch

is locked.

LX1024743 —UN—20NOV00
OULXE59,00108F1 -19-15FEB07-2/2

50-1 021412

PN=88
 Hitch

Hitch Remote Control

This switch allows the hitch to be operated from the
fender. For safety reasons, the hitch rises and drops at a
slower rate. The height and depth values are ignored.

LX1043860 —UN—23AUG07
Push upper switch - Raise implement
Push lower switch - Lower implement
NOTE: Once the fender control has been activated, the
hitch is prevented from moving accidentally. To
prepare the hitch for operation again, either:
• move hitch control (A) to the position that
corresponds to the position of the draft links,
• move control (A) to one of the end positions, or
• actuate raise/lower switch (B).

LX1043861 —UN—23AUG07
OU12401,0001807 -19-22AUG07-1/1

Lift Limit
The height to which implement is raised can be limited
at height-limit control (A) to any desired value between
minimum height (turn counter-clockwise) and maximum
height (turn clockwise).

LX1019342 —UN—07APR98
OULXE59,00108F3 -19-15FEB07-1/1

Transporting Mounted Implements

Raise mounted implement fully by pulling hitch control
lever (A) as far as it will go to the rear (beyond “0”).
For a towed implement, push the hitch control lever as far
LX1024744 —UN—20NOV00

as it will go to the front (to setting “9”).

OU12401,000052C -19-01DEC00-1/1

50-2 021412

PN=89
 Hitch

Hitch Dampening
The tractor is equipped with a hitch dampening function
that prevents the tractor from "pitching" when it is travelling
with a raised implement.

LX1024745 —UN—20NOV00
To activate the dampening function, first move hitch
control lever (A) (with the engine running) to the position
that corresponds to the position of the draft links. Then
pull it as far as it will go to the rear (beyond “0”) to the
transport position (see arrow). The rate-of-drop control
must NOT be in the left-hand end position.
To switch off the dampening function, push the hitch
control lever forward from the transport position to a
position beyond “0” (in the "drop" direction).
NOTE: Using the remote control and switching off
the engine both have the effect of switching
off the hitch dampening function.
OU12401,000052D -19-01DEC00-1/1

Adjust Rate of Implement Drop

The rate at which the hitch and mounted implement will
drop is controlled by turning control (A).
The rate-of-drop varies with the setting of control (A) and

LX1019343 —UN—07APR98
the weight of the mounted implement. The heavier the
implement, the faster the rate-of-drop and the lighter the
implement, the slower the rate-of-drop.

OULXE59,00108F4 -19-15FEB07-1/1

Depth Adjustment
Push down hitch control stop (A) and set the desired
working depth.
After lifting the implement, the same working depth will

LX1019344 —UN—07APR98
be selected the next time the implement is lowered. This
depth is indicated by resistance at hitch control lever (B).

OULXE59,00108F5 -19-15FEB07-1/1

50-3 021412

PN=90
 Hitch

Load/Depth Adjustment

CAUTION: Before connecting implements to the

three-point hitch, load/depth control (A) must be
moved to position "1" (depth control) to prevent

LX1019345 —UN—07APR98
unintentional raising or lowering of the hitch.

A—Load/depth control C—2-4=Mixed control

B—1=Depth control D—5=Load control

OULXE59,00108F6 -19-15FEB07-1/1

1 Depth Control
With load/depth control in this position, the implement is
held at the selected position.

LX1019346 —UN—07APR98
LX1026119 —UN—10MAY01
OU12401,00005E3 -19-28APR01-1/1

50-4 021412

PN=91
 Hitch

2-4 Mixed Control

The intermediate positions of the load/depth control allow
the effects of depth control and/or load control to be
infinitely varied as the ground conditions require.

LX1019324 —UN—07APR98
LX1026120 —UN—10MAY01
OU12401,00005E4 -19-28APR01-1/1

5 Load Control
With load/depth control in this position, the implement is
raised as resistance (soil density) increases and lowered
as resistance decreases, thus maintaining the preselected
load.

LX1019325 —UN—07APR98
LX1026059 —UN—18MAY01

OU12401,00005E5 -19-28APR01-1/1

50-5 021412

PN=92
 Hitch

Float position
In float position (for implements with gauge wheel),
implement can move freely up and down to follow ground
contours independently of the tractor. For this position,
set load/depth control (A) to ”1” and move hitch control

LX1031603 —UN—28OCT04
lever (B) as far as it will go to the front.

LX1026121 —UN—10MAY01
OULXE59,00106A0 -19-29SEP04-1/1

Direct Actuation
In the event of electrical failure, the hitch can be controlled
as follows:
Run the engine. Take off the protective cap.

LX1043862 —UN—17SEP07
From the operator's seat, press down the screw with a
screwdriver until it engages in the detent, and then turn to
the right until the three-point hitch rises.
See your John Deere dealer.

OU12401,0001808 -19-22AUG07-1/1

Three-Point Hitch
Tractors may be equipped with telescopic draft links or
quick-coupling (hook-type) draft links.
LX1043863 —UN—23AUG07

A—Center link C—Crank for adjusting lift links

B—Lift links D—Draft links

OU12401,0001809 -19-22AUG07-1/1

50-6 021412

PN=93
 Hitch

Telescopic Draft Links

These draft links are intended for Category II and
Category IIIN implements.
To facilitate hitching of implements, extend the draft links

LX1019661 —UN—17SEP99
to the rear.
1. Lift lock pin (A).
2. Pull telescopic draft links (B) to the rear.
After attaching and securing implements to draft links,
reverse the tractor until the lock pins snap into place.
Telescopic draft links
OU12401,0001425 -19-05JUN06-1/1

Quick-Coupling (Hook-Type) Draft Links

These draft links are intended for Category II and
Category III implement balls.
IMPORTANT: The balls must be the correct size.

LX1033644 —UN—17MAY04
Hitch Category Ball diameter (a)
II 56 mm 2.2 in.)
III 64 mm 2.5 in.)

Continued on next page OU12401,0001405 -19-13MAY06-1/6

50-7 021412

PN=94
 Hitch

How to use the coupler hooks

The couplers are operated by means of lever (A), which
can be actuated either by hand or by a control cable.
IMPORTANT: Make certain that the coupler

LX1033638 —UN—17MAY04
hooks are locked:
Lever (A) must be in contact with the coupler
hook, there must be no play noticeable at ball
(B), and pin (C) must enclose the ball.

If coupler hooks have a control cable, note how the cable

runs after the implement has been attached. If the cable
droops excessively or gets tangled in undergrowth or Coupler hook operated by hand
branches, the hooks may be opened by accident.

A—Lever C—Pin
B—Ball

LX1033641 —UN—17MAY04
Coupler hook operated by means of a control cable
OU12401,0001405 -19-13MAY06-2/6

Lock for draft link hooks

CAUTION: When implements with asymmetrical

load (e.g. side-mounted mowing unit) are
attached, or when driving through high-growing

LX1033645 —UN—17MAY04
bushes and trees (e.g. when working in the
forest), the draft links must be prevented
from opening accidentally.

Use John Deere AL165485 lock parts kit at both of the

coupler hooks.

A—Lock parts kit

Continued on next page OU12401,0001405 -19-13MAY06-3/6

50-8 021412

PN=95
 Hitch

The coupler hooks can be locked in their "open" position.

LX1033639 —UN—17MAY04
OU12401,0001405 -19-13MAY06-4/6

To close the coupler hook again, first pull the lever up at

an oblique angle.

LX1033640 —UN—17MAY04
OU12401,0001405 -19-13MAY06-5/6

NOTE: On very heavy, compact implements, the

lift links can be attached at the rear hole in
the draft links. This reduces the lifting height,
but maximizes the lifting force.

LX1033642 —UN—17MAY04

OU12401,0001405 -19-13MAY06-6/6

50-9 021412

PN=96
 Hitch

Attach Three-Point Hitch Mounted and Drawn

Implements
Be sure not to damage exposed parts of cab (see arrows)
when attaching three-point hitch mounted or drawn

LX1043864 —UN—23AUG07
implements.

CAUTION: Do not stand between tractor and

implement unless park lock and park brake
are both applied firmly.

IMPORTANT: When attaching three-point hitch

mounted or drawn implements for the first
time, conduct a trial to ensure that implement
will not damage cab in any position. With
hitch-mounted implements, pay attention to the
highest lift position; with drawn implements,
be careful when turning sharply.

LX1019346 —UN—07APR98
If a swinging drawbar is installed, set it in the front, short
position. The swinging drawbar can also be swung to the
right or left and secured there.
When attaching an implement, first make sure that the
load/depth control is set to 1 (depth control).

OULXE59,00109D8 -19-09DEC09-1/1

Leveling the Implement

To level implement from side-to-side, adjust the right-hand
lift link. Adjust center link to level fore-and-aft.
AG,OU12401,209 -19-07APR00-1/1

Center Link
Length of center link can be adjusted using adjusting
handle (A). Lift adjusting handle (A) and turn it until the
required length is achieved.

LX1029245 —UN—05MAY03
• Minimum length 530 mm (20.9 in.)
• Maximum length 725 mm (28.5 in.)
Do not deviate from the specified dimensions. Grooves in
the thread indicate the maximum permitted setting. The
threads must not be unscrewed any further out of the
receiver. After adjusting, push handle down again over
center link. Insert attaching pin through implement mast
and center link, and secure.
OU12401,000180B -19-22AUG07-1/1

50-10 021412

PN=97
 Hitch

Quick-Coupling (Hook-Type) Center Link

This center link is intended for Category II and Category
III implement balls.
IMPORTANT: The ball must be the correct size.

LX1033643 —UN—17MAY04
Hitch Category Ball diameter (a)
II 50 mm 2.0 in.)
III 60 mm 2.4 in.)

OU12401,0001406 -19-13MAY06-1/2

How to use the coupler hook

The coupler is operated by means of lever (A), which can
be actuated either by hand or by a control cable.
IMPORTANT: Make certain that the coupler

LX1031601 —UN—16SEP04
hook is locked:
Lever (A) must be in contact with the coupler
hook, there must be no play noticeable at ball
(B), and pin (C) must enclose the ball.

A—Lever C—Pin
B—Ball
Coupler hook operated by hand

LX1031602 —UN—16SEP04
Coupler hook operated by means of a control cable
OU12401,0001406 -19-13MAY06-2/2

Center Link Positions

The center link can be attached to the tractor in any one
of three different positions.
The lowest position provides maximum tilt angle but less
LX1043865 —UN—23AUG07

lifting force and should be used when working with a plow.

The highest position provides greater lifting force and
minimum tilt angle, and can be used when working with
machines such as direct drills.

OU12401,000180C -19-22AUG07-1/1

50-11 021412

PN=98
 Hitch

Lift Links
A greater transport clearance is obtained by shortening
the links. Extra working depth is obtained by lengthening
the links.

LX1037171 —UN—29SEP05
To level implement from side-to-side, adjust one link. Use
handle (A) to adjust the link. Do this by lifting handle (A)
out of lock (B) and setting the lift link to the length desired.
After adjustment is completed, push handle (A) down and
secure it with lock (B).
To adjust left lift link:
• If equipped with an adjusting handle, proceed in the
same way as for the right link.
• If not equipped with an adjusting handle, remove the
lift link from the draft link and screw yoke end (C) of
lift link in or out.

LX1035442 —UN—13JAN05
Length (D) of links must be kept within the limits stated.
A groove in the thread of each lift link indicates the
maximum permitted setting. The threads must not be
unscrewed any further out of the receiver.
• Minimum length 705 mm (27.8 in.)
• Maximum length 865 mm (34.1 in.)
NOTE: The lift link dimensions quoted above are with lift
links locked in draft links (no vertical float).

NOTE: A short lift link provides a short lifting height

and maximum lifting force.
A long lift link provides a long lifting height

LX1035443 —UN—13JAN05
and less lifting force.

IMPORTANT: When engaging the lift links in

the lift arms, make sure that stops (E) are
always at the rear as shown.

A—Adjusting Handle D—Length of Links

B—Lock E—Stops (2 on Each Lift Link)
C—Yoke End

LX1049744 —UN—03MAY10

OU12401,0001469 -19-30APR10-1/1

50-12 021412

PN=99
 Hitch

Adjust for Vertical Float

Depending on the position of the steel plates, draft links
can be adjusted to allow for vertical float or to lock out float.

A—Vertical float B—No float

LX000444 —UN—12AUG94

LX000445 —UN—12AUG94
LX1049780 —UN—23JUL10

LX,OREG 000329 -19-23JUL10-1/1

Sway Blocks (If Equipped)

Sway blocks (A) are used to limit sideways motion of draft
links during operation and transport.
Sway blocks must be fitted when working with attachments

LX1037172 —UN—29SEP05
which follow exactly the line of the tractor.
NOTE: If sideways motion is excessive even with
sway blocks installed, additional spacers can
be used between the PTO housing and the
sway-block mountings. See your John Deere
dealer for suitable spacer rings.

If the attachments (plow, disk harrow etc.) require

sideways motion in the operating position, remove
quick-lock pins (B) and take off the sway blocks.
With sway blocks in this position, draft links will sway
in operating position. However, sway is locked out in
LX1037173 —UN—29SEP05
transport position.

A—Sway block B—Quick-lock pin

OU12401,00012E4 -19-26SEP05-1/1

50-13 021412

PN=100
 Hitch

Stabilizing System (If Equipped)

The stabilizing system is operated by means of chain (A)
and flap cover (B). If flap cover (B) is raised, the draft links
have lateral play, otherwise they are locked.
Chain (A) short:

LX009469 —UN—02JAN95
Draft links are locked in raised position (rigid setting), in
lowered position they have lateral play.
Chain (A) long:
Draft links are locked in all positions.

LX,OREGEL000331 -19-01SEP95-1/1

Adjusting Spreading Dimension

Drive tractor to the center of the implement. Remove ring
(B) and lift up flap cover (A). Use lever (H) to adjust the
spreading dimension.
Groove (G) indicates the spreading dimension for

LX009470 —UN—03JAN95

LX009819 —UN—03JAN95
Category II and must be aligned with the edge (see arrow).
Then locate lever (H) on pin (C), put down flap cover (A)
and secure with ring (B). Finally, adjust spacer (D).
IMPORTANT: The spreading dimension must be
large enough to prevent draft links (E) from
interfering with sway blocks (F), as this may
result in mechanical damage.

A—Flap cover E—Draft link

B—Ring F— Sway block
C—Pin G—Groove for Category II
D—Spacer H—Lever

LX001750 —UN—05APR00
LX009844 —UN—03JAN95

AG,OU12401,213 -19-07APR00-1/1

50-14 021412

PN=101
 Power Take-Off
PTO Guard
CAUTION: Remove PTO cap (A) only when
the PTO is to be used.
As soon as PTO-driven implement is removed,

LX1037180 —UN—20APR07
re-install cap over PTO stub shaft.

Master shield (B) may be folded up when attaching certain

implements to the PTO, but it must be reinstalled as soon
as the implement is installed.

CAUTION: Never operate PTO unless the master

shield is in the position shown.

OU12401,00012EC -19-07OCT05-1/1

Operating Instructions
LX1049749 —UN—21MAY10

LX1049900 —UN—22FEB11
Articulation on drive shaft Align forks correctly

1— Z-shaped layout 2— W-shaped layout

As far as possible, angles (a) and (b) at the universal clutches and overload clutches, and to the
joints should be the same at both ends of the drive shaft. prescribed amount of overlap when shaped
pipes are pushed together.
In applications where this is not the case (e.g. sharp
turns with PTO engaged), it is recommended to use a IMPORTANT: Before using a PTO-driven implement,
continuous-velocity drive shaft. take action to ensure that the drive shaft
NOTE: The two schematic drawings do not show is lubricated regularly. Comply with
any guards on the drive shaft. A guard is instructions in the Operator's Manual provided
mandatory when using drive shafts. by the manufacturer.

IMPORTANT: Only operating conditions described IMPORTANT: On multi-component, telescopic drive

in the Operator's Manuals of the various shafts, the yokes at each end must be aligned
implements are permitted. This applies as shown. The yokes at each end must
particularly to maximum permissible angle NOT be at 90° to one another (see arrows
of articulation, to the use of freewheel in illustration on the right).

OULXBER,00018EA -19-15FEB11-1/1

PTO Options The tractor may be equipped with one of the following
IMPORTANT: Implements may be driven at PTO versions:
540 rpm only if their power input never
exceeds 70 kW (95 hp).
• 540 rpm PTO
• Reversible PTO for 540/1000 rpm
OU12401,000180E -19-22AUG07-1/1

55-1 021412

PN=102
 Power Take-Off

PTO Speeds
The engine speeds at which standard PTO speeds are
achieved are listed under ”Engine” in the ”Specifications”
section.
OU12401,00014A0 -19-29JUN06-1/1

PTO Operation

CAUTION: Always disengage the PTO

when not in use.

LX1043868 —UN—24AUG07
CAUTION: High-inertia implements do not stop
the moment the PTO control lever is shifted to
the disengaged position. Do NOT approach the
implement while it is coasting down. Do not work
on the implement until it has stopped.

The PTO can be engaged and disengaged on-the-go and

under load. When the PTO is switched on, an indicator
light will glow on the dashboard.
NOTE: If the engine is shut off and then restarted
To switch on the PTO, lift up the switch button and turn it while the PTO is running, the PTO will not
to the right. To switch off the PTO, press the button down. operate. Even so, the indicator light remains
NOTE: An audible signal is emitted and an indicator light on. Switch off PTO and then restart.
flashes on the dashboard if the operator leaves the
operator's seat while the PTO is engaged. The PTO
does not disengage when operator leaves seat.
OU12401,000180F -19-23NOV11-1/1

55-2 021412

PN=103
 Power Take-Off

Reversing Rear PTO Shafts

One end of the PTO stub shaft has 6 splines for operating
at 540 rpm, and the other end has 21 splines for operating
at 1000 rpm. Clean stub shaft thoroughly before installing.
1. Remove snap ring (A) and pull out stub shaft.

LX008630 —UN—15AUG94
2. Clean stub shaft thoroughly and coat it with grease.
Groove (B) facilitates installation of snap ring.
3. Insert stub shaft in PTO housing until snap ring (A)
fits into the groove.
4. Install snap ring.
NOTE: A flattened area on the stub shaft facilitates
removal and installation of snap ring.

LX012500 —UN—29JAN96
LX012501 —UN—29JAN96
LX012502 —UN—29JAN96

LX,OZAPF 008927 -19-01DEC95-1/1

55-3 021412

PN=104
 Power Take-Off

Attach PTO-Driven Equipment

CAUTION: Shut off engine and disengage PTO

before attaching PTO-driven equipment.

LX1037194 —UN—11OCT05
CAUTION: High-inertia implements do not
brake to a standstill the moment the PTO
control lever is shifted to the disengaged
position. Do NOT approach the implement
while it is “coasting down”. Do not work on
the implement until it has stopped.

CAUTION: Before attempting to clean, adjust or

lubricate a PTO-driven machine, the three-point A—Swinging drawbar B—Distance between end
of PTO shaft and hole in
hitch or u.j. shaft, always make sure the PTO is drawbar end
switched off and stopped, the tractor engine is
shut off and the ignition key is removed.

1. Align swinging drawbar (A) parallel to PTO shaft and

lock it in position.
2. Distance (B) from end of PTO shaft to hole in drawbar
end should be 350 mm (13.8 in.) for the 540 rpm PTO
and 400 mm (15.7 in.) for the 1000 rpm PTO.
OU12401,0001810 -19-22AUG07-1/1

55-4 021412

PN=105
 Ballast
Selecting Ballast
without special equipment, attachments, trailer or
CAUTION: When determining front and rear ballast, but with hydraulic oil and lubricants, a
axle ballast, ensure that permissible axle full fuel tank and an operator weighing 75 kg.
loads and the maximum permissible machine
weight (including mounted implements) are
not exceeded (see Specifications). CAUTION: Use suitable lifting tackle/hoists
when handling weights.
Comply with local regulations regarding
installation and maximum permissible number
Safety and performance of your tractor depend on correct
of weights. In order to maintain steerability, at
ballasting of front axle (front weights) and rear axle (wheel
least 20% of unladen mass must be on the front
weights, filling tires with liquid ballast).
axle. Unladen mass is the mass of the tractor
OU12401,0001AFB -19-25NOV08-1/1

Ballasting Rear Wheels

Rear wheel ballast should be chosen so as to give 10 to • Increased tire wear

15% wheel slippage when operating. Field tests have • High fuel consumption
shown that maximum horsepower available at the drawbar
occurs in this range. Too much ballast leads to:

Rear wheel ballast should never be such that the engine • Increased load and thereby loss of power
cannot be fully loaded at rated engine speed while the • Overloading of tires and gearbox
tractor is moving at 7 km/h (4.3 mph). If the engine labors • Soil compaction
or stalls below 7 km/h (4.3 mph), there is too much ballast • High fuel consumption
on the rear wheels. NOTE: Do not use more than 3 weights on each rear
Too little ballast leads to: wheel. Comply with the legal limits on tractor width.

• Excessive wheel spin and thereby loss of power

OU12401,0000CBE -19-02JAN03-1/1

Measuring Rear Wheel Slip

1. Mark tire (A).
2. Mark starting point on the ground (B).
3. Drive tractor forward with implement lowered until ten
revolutions of the rear wheel have been made (C).
4. Again place a marker on the ground (D).
5. Now raise implement and again drive between the two
markers on the ground. Note number of revolutions
made between the two markers (E).
LX000402 —UN—15AUG94

The number of revolutions gives the following percentage

of wheel slip:
• 10.0 revolutions = 0% wheel spin
• 9.5 revolutions = 5% wheel spin
• 9.0 revolutions = 10% wheel spin
• 8.5 revolutions = 15% wheel spin
• 8.0 revolutions = 20% wheel spin
• 7.5 revolutions = 25% wheel spin
• 7.0 revolutions = 30% wheel spin
LX,OSPU 000247 -19-01APR92-1/1

60-1 021412

PN=106
 Ballast

Installing Weights on Flanged Axle

CAUTION: When installing and removing

quick-catch weights, always position wheels so
that retainer jaws are at the top. This prevents

LX1031685 —UN—03APR03
weights from falling when cap screw is removed.

Attach first weight to wheel disk using three cap screws (A).
When installing further weights, position wheel so that
retainer jaws (B) are at the top. Hang weight in retainer
jaws and secure with a cap screw (C) at the bottom.

A—Screws of first weight C—Screws of further weights

B—Retainer jaws

LX1031686 —UN—03APR03
OU12401,00012FC -19-10OCT05-1/1

Installing Weights on Rack-and-Pinion Axle

Position the wheel so that rim mark (A) is at the top. Insert
special screws (B) from inside of rim and drive them
outward.
NOTE: If you want to install more than one weight,

LX001301 —UN—09AUG94
drive the three special screws through the square
countersunk bores in the first weight (from the
inside, and before you install it). Install the second
weight with its notch separated from the notch on
the first weight by 180°. Install the third weight
turned the same way as the first weight.

Install weight so that notch (C) on weight is aligned with

mark (A). Tighten special screws (B) securely.
NOTE: Screws (D) shown in illustration are for
the second weight.
LX001302 —UN—09AUG94
A—Rim mark C—Notch
B—Special screws D—Screws for next weight

AG,OU12401,217 -19-07APR00-1/1

60-2 021412

PN=107
 Ballast

Filling Tires with Liquid Ballast

To fill a tire, jack up the wheel and turn it so that the tire
valve is at the top. Remove the valve insert and screw
water valve onto valve stem. While the water is entering,
air escapes through lateral bore in water valve. Stop filling

LX009450 —UN—03JAN95
tire when water drains from vent hole of valve. Filling a
tire takes 15 to 30 minutes, depending on tire size. Then
screw in air valve and pump up tire to the normal inflation
pressure. The quantity of liquid ballast required varies
depending on tire size and type. If in doubt, consult your
John Deere dealer or tire manufacturer.
If low temperatures are expected, an anti-freeze solution
should be used. Tire manufacturers recommend a mixture
of water and calcium chloride. of calcium chloride in 86 liters (22.7 U.S. gal.) of water to
The anti-freeze solution may be sucked from an elevated obtain 100 liters (26.4 U.S. gal.) of anti-freeze solution.
tank. To speed up the filling operation, a pump may be This solution produces an increase in weight of 120 kg
used (flush pump with clear water afterwards). To provide (269 lb). Add calcium chloride to the water - not vice
protection down to -25° C (-13° F), dissolve 34 kg (75 lb) versa. Do not fill radiator with this anti-freeze solution.
OU12401,00012FE -19-10OCT05-1/1

Draining the Tires

Jack up wheel. Remove air valve and allow water to drain
out.
To clear the remainder of the water from the tire, insert
the drain tube with the hose extension and pump air into

LX009451 —UN—03JAN95
the tire. The air pressure will push the remaining water
out of the tire.

LX,OSPU 000251 -19-01OCT94-1/1

Installing Front Weights

One basic weight (A) and up to 14 front weights may be
installed. The basic weight weighs 110 kg (243 lb). Each
additional weight weighs 47 kg (104 lb).
The additional weights must be installed in pairs, one on
either side of the central pin.
RXA0074569 —UN—22APR04

A—Basic weight

Continued on next page OU12401,000146E -19-20JUN06-1/3

60-3 021412

PN=108
 Ballast

To install up to 6 additional weights, install one attaching

screw of suitable length on either side, and secure it with
a nut. Tighten the nuts to 230 Nm (170 lb-ft).

B—Attaching screw

RXA0074571 —UN—22APR04
OU12401,000146E -19-20JUN06-2/3

To install more than 6 weights, install retainers (C)

between the weights. Install one retainer with the threaded
bore uppermost and one retainer with the threaded bore
at the bottom. Tighten the screws to 230 Nm (170 lb-ft).

C—Retainer

RXA0074573 —UN—22APR04
OU12401,000146E -19-20JUN06-3/3

60-4 021412

PN=109
 Wheel Tread, Tires
Use of Dual Wheels (easy-to-attach)
Dual wheels may be used on the rear axles of tractors for either as a field attachment or as an
the purpose of floatation or soil compaction reduction only. integrated part of a drum design coupling
system as Allied Equipment.
They are only recommended for use in the field and
should be removed prior to driving on public roads. NOTE: Retighten the wheel nuts regularly to the
IMPORTANT: When installing, wheel disc specified torque. See Break-in Period or
reinforcements must be fitted These discs Service / Every 250 Hours.
are available from your John Deere dealer
OULXBER,0001980 -19-03SEP10-1/1

Adjustable Front Axle (Tractors without Front-Wheel Drive)

The front axle can be adjusted at each end in increments Tire size Wheel disk inward Wheel disk outward
of 51 mm (2 in.). Maximum wheel tread is obtained by 7.50-18 1491 - 2001 mm 1531 - 2041 mm
reversing the front wheels. 58.7 - 78.8 in. 60.3 - 80.4 in.

If front wheels are removed to adjust tread, tighten front 7.50-20 1470 - 1980 mm 1546 - 2056 mm
wheel bolts to 250 Nm (185 lb-ft) once the wheels are 57.9 - 78.0 in. 60.9 - 80.9 in.
replaced.
10.00-16 — 1533 - 2043 mm
IMPORTANT: After the first 4 and 8 hours of — 60.4 - 80.4 in.
operation, retighten all front wheel bolts. Check
tightness of these bolts frequently during 11L-15 1493 - 2003 mm 1533 - 2043 mm
the next 100 hours of operation. 58.8 - 78.9 in. 60.4 - 80.4 in.

NOTE: Wheel tread on tractors equipped with a front 11L-16 — 1538 - 2048 mm
— 60.4 - 80.6 in.
loader must not exceed 1.80 m (71 in.).

IMPORTANT: To avoid excessive stress on axle 27/9.5-15 1493 - 2003 mm 1533 - 2043 mm
58.8 - 78.9 in. 60.4 - 80.4 in.
bolts, do not separate axle halves beyond
the specified limits.

NOTE: On tractors with axle extension, tread width

increases by up to 542 mm (21.3 in.).
OU12401,0001812 -19-25AUG07-1/1

Adjust Front Axle

Adjust axle ends
Raise the front of the tractor and support it SAFELY under
the center part of the axle. LX000390 —UN—05APR00

Suspend the axle end from a suitable hoist, and remove

clamp bolts (A) and axle end screws (B). Reposition axle
ends to the desired front wheel tread. Re-insert screws in
axle ends and tighten to 400 Nm (295 lb.-ft.).
Adjust tie-rods to desired front-wheel tread, re-insert
clamp bolts and tighten to 50 Nm (35 lb.-ft.). Then check
toe-in (see relevant passage in this Section).
Continued on next page OULXBER,0001985 -19-14SEP10-1/5

65-1 021412

PN=110
 Wheel Tread, Tires

Use tie-rod extensions

Depending on the position of axle ends (see illustrations
of front axle), tie-rod extensions may be required.
Position of axle arm Tie-rod extension required

LX1049809 —UN—13SEP10
1 and 2 No extension required
Short Extension L150047
3 and 4
(102 mm; 4 in.)
Long Extension L157909 (204
5 and 6
mm; 8 in.)

A—Locknut (250 Nm; 185 lb.-ft.) D—Slotted Nut (100 Nm; 75

B—Short Extension L150047 lb.-ft.)
(102 mm; 4 in.) E—Cotter Pin
C—Long Extension L157909
(204 mm; 8 in.)

LX1049810 —UN—13SEP10
LX1049811 —UN—13SEP10
Continued on next page OULXBER,0001985 -19-14SEP10-2/5

65-2 021412

PN=111
 Wheel Tread, Tires

Install tie-rod extensions

1. Raise the front of the tractor and support it SAFELY
under the center part of the axle.
2. Loosen locknut (A). While doing so, hold tie-rod (F) so

LX1023960 —UN—30NOV99
that it cannot move.
3. Remove cotter pin and take off slotted nut (B).
4. Use a copper- or plastic-headed hammer to drive out
the end of the tie-rod. Use a ball-joint puller, if available.
5. Suspend the axle end from a suitable hoist, and then
remove axle end screws (D).
6. Move axle end to desired position, install screws (D),
A—Locknut D—Axle End Screws
and tighten to 400 Nm (295 lb.-ft.). B—Slotted Nut E—Tie-Rod Extension
C—Joint Arm F— Tie-Rod
7. Depending on tread width, the tie-rod on both sides
of the axle must be extended or shortened. See Use
tie-rod extensions above.
8. Screw the tie-rod extension into the joint arm and then
Before installing the extension, the joint arm must be reconnect the joint arm to the tie-rod.
disconnected from the tie-rod.
OULXBER,0001985 -19-14SEP10-3/5

9. Install joint arm on steering arm, tighten slotted nut to

100 Nm (75 lb.-ft.), and install a new cotter pin.
10. Hold the joint arm so that it cannot move and tighten
the tie-rod extension to 300 Nm (220 lb.-ft.). Then
check and adjust toe-in (see relevant passage in this

LX1023122 —UN—08JUN99
Section).

OULXBER,0001985 -19-14SEP10-4/5

11. After adjusting toe-in, tighten the locknut to 250 Nm

(185 lb.-ft.). While tightening the locknut, hold the
tie-rod extension so that it cannot move. LX1023123 —UN—08JUN99

OULXBER,0001985 -19-14SEP10-5/5

65-3 021412

PN=112
 Wheel Tread, Tires

Change Wheels Safely

Due to the big size and the heavy weight of tractor wheels,
pay attention to the following points when changing
wheels:
• Before changing wheels, place tractor on firm, level

LX1049987 —UN—15JUL11
ground.
• Engage park lock and prevent the tractor from rolling
away by putting down chock blocks.
• Remove the ignition key to prevent unauthorized
operation.
• When removing rear wheels, prevent front axle
oscillation by using wedges.
KJD10581 - Wheel Dolly
• When jacking up the tractor, only use the recommended
lifting points, see Jack Up the Tractor - Lifting Points in
Section 85 of this Operator's Manual.
• Use a stable lifting jack with sufficient lifting force. See
Specifications, Loads and Weights in Section 145.
• Stop jacking up the tractor when the wheel is completely
off the ground.

LX1053310 —UN—23SEP11
• Use a suitable wheel dolly, especially when removing
a rear wheel. This is available from your John Deere
dealer as special tool KJD10581.
• Support the tractor when a wheel is removed. Jack
stands are available from your John Deere dealer as
special tools JT02043 and JT02044.
• When installing wheels, make sure that the correct
Jack Stand JT02043 or JT02044
torques are applied, see Tighten Wheel Bolts and
Wheel Weights in Section 95 of this Operator's Manual.
JT02043—Jack Stand, 482 to JT02044—Jack Stand, 863 to
736 mm (19 to 29 in.) 1117 mm (34 to 44 in.)
CAUTION: Do not operate the tractor until the
wheel change has been completed.
When changing wheels, make sure that no-one
When storing removed wheels, make sure
is standing in the danger zone.
that they cannot fall.
When removing a wheel, make sure that the
tractor is supported safely.
OULXBER,0001AA7 -19-22SEP11-1/1

65-4 021412

PN=113
 Wheel Tread, Tires

Check Toe-In
1. Make sure wheels are in the straight forward position
by driving tractor in a straight line for approx. 15 m
(50 ft).

LX1049286 —UN—08JUN10
CAUTION: Keep the engine switched off while
making the measurements, and secure the
tractor so that it cannot roll away.

2. First, put marks (+) at axle height on the front (1) of

each of the two front wheels.
3. At the front, measure distance (1) from the edge of the Tractor with Front-Wheel Drive
right rim to the edge of the left rim, and make a note of
this measurement.
4. Roll the tractor forward by half the circumference of
the front wheel, bringing the (+) mark to the rear (2).
5. At the rear, measure distance (2) from the edge of the

LX1049288 —UN—08JUN10
right rim to the edge of the left rim, and make a note of
this measurement.
Tractor with front-wheel drive: Dimension (1) at the
front must correspond to dimension (2) at the rear. A
deviation of ± 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) is permissible.
Tractor without front-wheel drive: Dimension (1) at
Tractor with Front-Wheel Drive
the front must be 3 to 9 mm (0.12 to 0.35 in.) less than
dimension (2) at the rear.

LX1049289 —UN—09JUN10
Tractor without Front-Wheel Drive

LX1049290 —UN—09JUN10

Tractor without Front-Wheel Drive

OULXBER,00018EE -19-17SEP10-1/1

65-5 021412

PN=114
 Wheel Tread, Tires

Adjust Toe-In (Tractors without Front-Wheel

Drive Axle)
Version 1
Take out collar pin (A) and remove tie rod. Slacken off

LX000774 —UN—05APR00
clamping screw (B) and adjust the position of tie-rod end
(C). Screwing the tie-rod end in reduces toe-in; screwing
the tie-rod end out increases toe-in.
After adjustment is completed, tighten clamping screw (B)
to between 45 and 55 Nm (33 and 40 lb.-ft.). Secure the
tie rod to the knuckle and spindle assembly.
IMPORTANT: The grease fitting must be in the
position shown in the picture.

On tractors without front-wheel drive axle, toe-in must be

between 3 and 9 mm (0.12 and 0.35 in.).
AG,OU12401,290 -19-15SEP10-1/2

Version 2
Hold joint arm (A) so that it cannot move, slacken locknut
(B), and adjust the position of threaded rod (C). Screwing
threaded rod (C) into the tie-rod end reduces toe-in;
screwing it out of the tie-rod end increases toe-in.

LX1049812 —UN—15SEP10
After adjusting, hold the joint arm so that it cannot move,
and tighten locknut (B) to 250 Nm (185 lb.-ft.).
On tractors without front-wheel drive axle, toe-in must be
between 3 and 9 mm (0.12 and 0.35 in.).

AG,OU12401,290 -19-15SEP10-2/2

Adjust Toe-In (Tractors with Front-Wheel

Drive Axle)
1. Align front wheels for travelling straight ahead, shut off
the engine, move the transmission to park position
and remove the ignition key.

LX1029216 —UN—02APR03
2. Loosen locknut (A).
NOTE: Toe-in of ± 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) is permissible.
See Check Toe-In in this section.

3. Turn rod (B) to obtain desired toe-in or toe-out.

Specification
Maximum toe-in or
toe-out—Clearance...................................................................... 1.5 mm A—Locknut B—Rod
(0.06 in.)

4. Tighten locknut (A) to specified torque.

Specification
Locknut—Torque...............................................................220 to 240 Nm
162 to 177 lb.-ft.
OULXBER,0001915 -19-15SEP10-1/1

65-6 021412

PN=115
 Wheel Tread, Tires

Front Wheel Tread Adjustment (Tractors With

Front Wheel Drive)
The tractor can be equipped with reversible or adjustable
wheel rims.
AG,OU12401,292 -19-10APR00-1/1

Tires Wheels disk inward Wheel disk outward

Adjusting Front Wheel Tread with Reversible
Wheel Rims 10.5/80-18 1582 mm 1749 mm
280/70-16 (62.3 in.) (68.9 in.)
Wheel tread can be adjusted by installing the complete
wheel on the other side of the tractor. In doing so,
maintain the direction of tire rotation.
NOTE: Wheel tread on tractors equipped with a front
loader must not exceed 1.80 m (71 in.).
OU12401,0001473 -19-20JUN06-1/1

65-7 021412

PN=116
 Wheel Tread, Tires

Tread Adjustment with Adjustable Rims

LX1035458 —UN—15APR05
Wheel tread can be adjusted by replacing or reversing
the wheel rims. Additional tread widths can be achieved NOTE: Wheel tread on tractors equipped with a front
by using spacers. loader must not exceed 1.80 m (71 in.).

In addition the complete wheel can be installed on the

other side of the tractor. In doing so, maintain the direction
of tire rotation.
Positions of rims, wheel disks and spacers

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

mm 1524 1552 1584 1616 1720 1748 1782 1812 1924 1952 1984 2016
(in.) (60) (61.1) (62.4) (63.6) (67.7) (68.8) (70.2) (71.3) (75.7) (76.9) (78.1) (79.4)
Tires:
280/85-24 x x x x x x x x x x x x
320/85-24 x x x x x x x x x x x x
340/85-24 x x x x x x x x x x x x
380/70-24 x* x* x* x x x x x x x x x
380/85-24 x* x* x* x x x x x x x x x
420/70-24 — — — x x x x x x x x x
420/85-24 — — — — x x x x x x x x
480/70-24 — — — — x x x x x x x x
540/65-24 — — — — x* x* x* x x x x x
320/85-28 x x x x x x x x x x x x
340/85-28 — — — x x x x x x x x x
11.2-24 x x x x x x x x x x x x
12.4-24 x x x x x x x x x x x x
13.6-24 x x x x x x x x x x x x
14.9-24 x* x* x* x x x x x x x x x
16.9-24 — — — — x x x x x x x x
12.4-28 x x x x x x x x x x x x
13.6-28 — — — x x x x x x x x x
13.6-38 — — — x x x x x x x x x

* With pivoting fenders only

OU12401,0001813 -19-25AUG07-1/1

65-8 PN=117
021412
 Wheel Tread, Tires

Tighten Wheel Nuts

After adjusting front wheel tread, tighten nuts (A) and (B).
IMPORTANT: After the first 4 and 8 hours of operation,
retighten all front wheel attaching nuts. Check

LX1036254 —UN—16AUG05
tightness of these nuts frequently during the
next 100 hours of operation.

A—300 Nm (220 lb-ft) B—250 Nm (185 lb-ft)

OU12401,0001711 -19-02APR07-1/1

Adjusting the Fixed Fenders

The fenders may be adjusted individually. Several
adjusting positions are possible. Tilt, width and height of
the fenders can be adjusted depending on tire size. To
do so, proceed as follows:

A—Support to base plate C—Base plate (tractor side)

(wheel side) D—Base plate (wheel side)
B—Support to base plate
(tractor side)

LX1033634 —UN—08AUG06
Continued on next page OU12401,00015BC -19-14DEC06-1/4

65-9 021412

PN=118
 Wheel Tread, Tires

1. Raise front of tractor so that the front wheel drive axle

can pivot freely.
2. Turn steering wheel in both directions and pivot the
axle to determine the most suitable fender mounting
position.

LX1031619 —UN—31MAY06
3. Adjust fender position so that the minimum clearances
(see illustration) are met. There must not be any
contact with the tractor frame.
A = 40 mm (1.57 in.), B = 60 mm (2.36 in.)

LX1033894 —UN—11MAR04
OU12401,00015BC -19-14DEC06-2/4

4. Also adjust the steering stops to make sure that

neither the wheel nor the fender come into contact
with the tractor frame.

LX1031620 —UN—24APR06
OU12401,00015BC -19-14DEC06-3/4

Tighten the screws to the following torque values:

Screws (A) ............................ 140 Nm (105 lb-ft)
Screws (B) ............................ 140 Nm (105 lb-ft)
Screws (C) ............................ 190 Nm (140 lb-ft)
LX1033635 —UN—10MAY04

A—Cap screws, support to C—Hex. socket screws, base

base plate to knuckle housing
B—Cap screws, base plate to
base

OU12401,00015BC -19-14DEC06-4/4

65-10 021412

PN=119
 Wheel Tread, Tires

Adjusting the Pivoting Fenders

The fenders may be adjusted individually. Several
adjusting positions are possible. Tilt, width and height of
the fenders can be adjusted depending on tire size. If the
intention is to change between positions C and D, turn
the part around (do NOT install it on the other side of the
tractor). Then adjust the front-to-rear angle of adjusting
arm (E). To make the adjustment, follow this procedure:

A—Support to adjusting arm D—Pivot plate (wheel side)

(wheel side) E—Adjusting arm
B—Support to adjusting arm
(tractor side)
C—Pivot plate (tractor side)

LX1038316 —UN—08AUG06
OU12401,00015BD -19-14DEC06-1/4

1. Raise front of tractor so that the front wheel drive axle

can pivot freely.
2. Turn steering wheel in both directions and pivot the
axle to determine the most suitable fender mounting
position.

LX1031619 —UN—31MAY06
3. Adjust fender position so that the minimum clearances
(see illustration) are met. There must not be any
contact with the tractor frame.
A = 40 mm (1.57 in.), B = 60 mm (2.36 in.)
4. Adjust fender stop to prevent it from being seized at
the edges with steering wheel fully turned and axle
pivoting. Make sure that the stop contacts the tractor
frame before the fender can hit the frame.
LX1033894 —UN—11MAR04

Continued on next page OU12401,00015BD -19-14DEC06-2/4

65-11 021412

PN=120
 Wheel Tread, Tires

5. Also adjust the steering stops to make sure that the

wheel does not come into contact with the tractor
frame.

LX1031620 —UN—24APR06
OU12401,00015BD -19-14DEC06-3/4

Tighten the screws to the following torque values:

Screws (A) ............................ 140 Nm (105 lb-ft)
Screw (B) .............................. 300 Nm (220 lb-ft)
Screws (C) ............................ 140 Nm (105 lb-ft)

LX1033893 —UN—11MAR04
Screws (D) ............................ 190 Nm (140 lb-ft)

A—Cap screws, support to C—Cap screws, pivot plate to

adjusting arm base
B—Cap screw, adjusting arm D—Hex. socket screws, base
to joint to knuckle housing

OU12401,00015BD -19-14DEC06-4/4

Rear Wheel Tread Adjustment with Flanged

Axle
IMPORTANT: The distance between the side wall
of the tire and the fender must not be less
than 50 mm (1.97 in.).

LX1019752 —UN—05APR00
The distance between the running surface
(edge) of the tire and the fender must not
be less than 60 mm (2.36 in.).

Rear-wheel tread can be adjusted by replacing or

reversing the wheel rims. Additional tread widths can be
achieved by using spacers.
When reversing wheels, they must be changed from one A—500 Nm (370 lb-ft) B—250 Nm (185 lb-ft)
side to the other so that the arrow on the side wall still
points in the direction of forward rotation.
After adjustment has been completed, tighten wheel IMPORTANT: After adjusting wheel tread, retighten
retaining bolts to specified torque (see Section ”Break-In all wheel attaching nuts after 4 and 8
Period”). hours of operation. Check tightness of
these nuts frequently during the next 100
The relationship of the rear wheel disk and rim in obtaining
hours of operation.
the different tread settings is shown in the following
drawings. A study of these drawings before attempting to
change tread setting will save time and unnecessary labor.
OU12401,0001478 -19-21JUN06-1/1

65-12 021412

PN=121
 Wheel Tread, Tires

Positions of Rims and Wheel Disks with Flanged Axle

LX1035459 —UN—05APR05
For tread widths, see the following table.
OU12401,0001479 -19-21JUN06-1/1

Tread Widths, Flanged Axle

Positions of rims, wheel disks and spacers (see previous drawing)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

mm 1510 1612 1642 1676 1706 1816 1846 1880 1910

(in.) (59.4) (63.5) (64.6) (66.0) (67.2) (71.5) (72.7) (74.0) (75.2)
Tires
420/85-24 — x x x x x x x x
420/85-30 — x x x x x x x x
460/85-30 — x x x x x x x x
420/85-34 — x x x x x x x x
460/85-34 — x x x x x x x x
460/85-38 — x x x x x x x x
16.9-24 — x x x x x x x x
18.4-26 — x x x x x x x x
16.9-30 — x x x x x x x x
18.4-30 — x x x x x x x x
16.9-34 — x x x x x x x x
18.4-34 — x x x x x x x x
18.4-38 — x x x x x x x x
13.6-46 x x x x x x x x x

OU12401,0001814 -19-25AUG07-1/1

65-13 021412

PN=122
 Wheel Tread, Tires

Rear Wheel Tread Adjustment with

Rack-and-Pinion Axle
NOTE: Adjustment of wheels is only possible when not
more than two weights are attached to each wheel.

1. Clean the axle with a wire brush.

2. Jack up tractor and turn rear wheel so that rack on
axle faces upward.
3. Loosen the attaching bolts completely.
4. Tighten the jack screws until the screw heads are flush
against the face of the wheel hub.
NOTE: If the sleeve does not break loose at once, also
loosen the three special screws on inboard side
of wheel. If sleeve still does not break loose,
strike end of axle several times with a heavy
hammer. Evenly retighten jack screws. It helps
to soak the sleeves in penetrating oil.

5. Turn adjusting screw in or out until desired position

is reached.
6. Back jack screws all the way out against stop, but do
not use force.
7. Lubricate threads and retighten attaching bolts
alternately to 400 Nm (300 lb-ft). Retighten bolts
several times until all three stay tightened to specified
torque. When the attaching bolts are tightened to
specified torque, the jack screws should be free to
turn. If this is not the case, loosen jack screws and

L102691 —UN—13APR00
retighten attaching bolts to specified torque.
8. After completing wheel tread adjustment, make sure
that tires and wheel ballast weights do not rub against
the tractor. Then drive tractor approx. 50 m (160 ft.),
stop the tractor and retighten attaching bolts to 400
Nm (300 lb-ft). The bolts must be retightened to torque
after 4 hours, after 8 hours and several times within
the next 100 hours. See "Break-In Period".
IMPORTANT: The distance between the side wall of
the tire and the fender must not be less than
50 mm (1.97 in.). The distance between the
running surface (edge) of the tire and the fender
must not be less than 60 mm (2.36 in.).
Continued on next page OU12401,000147B -19-21JUN06-1/2

65-14 021412

PN=123
 Wheel Tread, Tires

Turn wheel hub (pinion inside)

For loosening, adjusting and tightening wheel hub, see
previous page.
1. To facilitate assembly, remove rear wheel.
2. Remove snap ring (A). Turn adjusting screw so that

LX008633 —UN—16AUG94

LX008634 —UN—16AUG94
wheel hub (B) is at maximum width. Remove wheel
hub (B).
3. Put wheel on axle at desired position. Turn wheel hub
(B) around and install it.
4. Install wheel and snap ring (A). For further assembly,
see previous page.
IMPORTANT: The distance between the side wall of
the tire and the fender must not be less than
50 mm (1.97 in.). The distance between the
running surface (edge) of the tire and the fender
must not be less than 60 mm (2.36 in.).
OU12401,000147B -19-21JUN06-2/2

Positions of Rims and Wheel Disks with Rack-and-Pinion Axle

LX009838 —UN—03JAN95
30 in. and 38 in. cast wheels

LX009839 —UN—03JAN95
34 in. cast wheels
LX008635 —UN—16AUG94

Steel wheels

NOTE: Use the drawings to determine the appropriate Only positions A, B, G and H are possible
position of rims and wheel disks. Positions with 30 in. wheels.
vary depending on type used.
OU12401,000147C -19-21JUN06-1/1

65-15 021412

PN=124
 Wheel Tread, Tires

Tread Widths, Rack-and-Pinion Axle

Wheels Tires Position Tread widths Position Tread widths
Cast wheels
(8-position) 16.9-38 A 1563-1736 mm (61.5-68.3 in.) E 1624-2010 mm (63.9-79.1 in.)
B 1563-1940 mm (61.5-76.4 in.) F 1828-2214 mm (72.0-87.2 in.)
C 1563-1936 mm (61.5-76.2 in.) G 1824-2210 mm (71.8-87.0 in.)
D 1710-2140 mm (67.3-84.3 in.) H 2028-2414 mm (79.8-95.0 in.)
18.4-38 A 1563-1736 mm (61.5-68.3 in.) E 1624-2010 mm (63.9-79.1 in.)
B 1563-1940 mm (61.5-76.4 in.) F 1828-2214 mm (72.0-87.2 in.)
C 1563-1936 mm (61.5-76.2 in.) G 1824-2210 mm (71.8-87.0 in.)
D 1710-2140 mm (67.3-84.3 in.) H 2028-2414 mm (79.8-95.0 in.)
Cast wheels
(4-position) 16.9-30 A 1563-1734 mm (61.5-68.3 in.) G 1826-2212 mm (71.9-87.1 in.)
B 1563-1938 mm (61.5-76.3 in.) H 2030-2416 mm (79.9-95.1 in.)
18.4-30 A 1604-1734 mm (63.1-68.3 in.) G 1826-2212 mm (71.9-87.1 in.)
B 1604-1938 mm (63.1-76.3 in.) H 2030-2416 mm (79.9-95.1 in.)
16.9-34 A 1668-2098 mm (65.7-82.6 in.) C 1563-1848 mm (61.5-72.8 in.)
B 1872-2302 mm (73.7-90.6 in.) D 1666-2052 mm (65.6-80.8 in.)
18.4-34 A 1668-2098 mm (65.7-82.6 in.) C 1604-1848 mm (63.1-82.3 in.)
B 1872-2302 mm (73.7-90.6 in.) D 1666-2052 mm (65.6-80.8 in.)
Steel wheels 12.4-42a A 1440-1732 mm (56.7-68.2 in.) E 1692-2132 mm (66.6-83.9 in.)
B 1440-1836 mm (56.7-72.3 in.) F 1796-2236 mm (70.7-88.0 in.)
C 1472-1912 mm (58.0-75.3 in.) G 1872-2312 mm (73.7-91.0 in.)
D 1576-2016 mm (62.0-79.4 in.) H 1976-2416 mm (77.8-95.1 in.)
13.6-46a A 1473-1752 mm (58.0-69.0 in.) E 1712-2152 mm (67.4-84.7 in.)
B 1473-1856 mm (58.0-73.1 in.) F 1816-2256 mm (71.5-88.8 in.)
C 1492-1932 mm (58.7-76.1 in.) G 1852-2292 mm (72.9-90.2 in.)
D 1556-1996 mm (61.3-78.6 in.) H 1956-2396 mm (77.0-94.3 in.)

a
Wheel hub with pinion outside. By turning wheel hub around to put the pinion inside, it is possible to increase tread width by 50 mm (2 in.).

On the long rack-and-pinion axle, the maximum tread

widths quoted above increase by 286 mm (11.3 in.).

A—Short rack-and-pinion axle B—Long rack-and-pinion axle

(29 teeth) (42 teeth)

LX007820 —UN—15AUG94

OU12401,000147D -19-22JUN06-1/1

65-16 021412

PN=125
 Wheel Tread, Tires

Service Tires Safely

CAUTION: Explosive separation of a tire and rim

parts can cause serious injury or death.
Do not attempt to mount a tire unless you
have the proper equipment and experience
to perform the job.

Always maintain the correct tire pressure. Do not inflate

the tires above the recommended pressure.
Never weld or heat a wheel and tire assembly. The heat
can cause an increase in air pressure resulting in a tire
explosion. Welding can structurally weaken or deform
the wheel.
When inflating tires, use a clip-on chuck and extension
hose long enough to allow you to stand to one side and
NOT in front of or over the tire assembly. Use a safety
cage if available.
Check wheels for low pressure, cuts, bubbles, damaged
rims or missing lug bolts and nuts.

TS211 —UN—23AUG88
DX,RIM1 -19-27OCT08-1/1

Tire Pressures, General

Long life and satisfactory performance of the tires depend pressures. Tires from different manufacturers may have
on proper tire inflation. Under-inflation of tires leads different load-bearing capacities. If in doubt, consult your
to rapid wear. Over-inflated tires reduce traction and John Deere dealer or tire manufacturer.
increase wheel slippage and soil compaction.
Comply with the maximum permissible axle loads in the
The following charts show how one single tire has Specifications section.
different load-bearing capacities under various air
OU12401,0001AD2 -19-15OCT08-1/1

65-17 021412

PN=126
 Wheel Tread, Tires

Ascertain the Correct Tire Pressure

IMPORTANT: Implements mounted on the three-point determining rear axle weight. If tractor is
hitch exert considerable weight on the rear axle. equipped with both a front- and rear-mounted
Include this added weight when determining implement, raise both implements.
correct inflation pressures.
Check tire pressure when the tire is cold, using an
Weigh the tractor as described below in order to determine accurate pressure gauge scaled to 10 kPa (0.1 bar; 1 psi).
the correct tire pressure:
Set tire inflation pressures according to weight
• Determine front axle weight with the implement on the measured. Set tire pressure as recommended by the
three-point hitch lowered. tire manufacturer for the tires selected. Maximum tire
• Determine rear axle weight with the implement on the pressure is specified on tire sidewall.
three-point hitch raised.
On tractors with loaders, front tire pressure must be
NOTE: If tractor is equipped with a front-mounted 30 kPa (0.3 bar; 4 psi) above the calculated value to
implement, raise implement when determining compensate for the changed weight distribution.
front axle weight and lower implement when
OU12401,0001ABB -19-16OCT08-1/1

Tire Pressure (for 30 km/h; 18.5 mph) — Front Tires on Tractors without Front-Wheel Drive
Tire size 150 kPa 200 kPa 220 kPa 250 kPa 280 kPa 310 kPa 340 kPa 370 kPa
(1.5 bar) (2.0 bar) (2.2 bar) (2.5 bar) (2.8 bar) (3.1 bar) (3.4 bar) (3.7 bar)
(22 psi) (29 psi) (32 psi) (36 psi) (41 psi) (45 psi) (49 psi) (54 psi)
9.5L-15 8PR — — — — — 1120 kg — —
(2470 lb)
11L-15 8PR 730 kg 875 kg 930 kg 1010 kg 1090 kg — — —
(1609 lb) (1929 lb) (2050 lb) (2227 lb) (2403 lb)
27/9.50-15 6PR — — 580 kg — 630 kg 725 kg — —
(1279 lb) (1389 lb) (1598 lb)
10.00-16 10PR — — — 1110 kg 1190 kg 1260 kg 1325 kg —
(2447 lb) (2624 lb) (2778 lb) (2921 lb)
11L-16 12PR 700 kg 845 kg 900 kg 985 kg 1065 kg — — —
(1543 lb) (1863 lb) (1984 lb) (2172 lb) (2348 lb)
7.50-18 8PR 540 kg 670 kg — 760 kg 810 kg 855 kg 895 kg 945 kg
(1191 lb) (1477 lb) (1676 lb) (1786 lb) (1885 lb) (1973 lb) (2083 lb)
7.50-20 8PR 605 kg 710 kg — 815 kg 875 kg 925 kg 980 kg 1030 kg
(1334 lb) (1565 lb) (1797 lb) (1929 lb) (2093 lb) (2161 lb) (2271 lb)

OULXE59,001096E -19-18OCT08-1/1

65-18 021412

PN=127
 Wheel Tread, Tires

Tire Pressure (for 40 km/h; 25 mph) — Front Tires on Tractors with Front-Wheel Drive
Tire size 80 kPa 100 kPa 120 kPa 140 kPa 160 kPa
(0.8 bar) (1.0 bar) (1.2 bar) (1.4 bar) (1.6 bar)
(12 psi) (15 psi) (17 psi) (20 psi) (23 psi)
11.2R24 114A8 900 kg (1984 lb) 975 kg (2150 lb) 1060 kg (2337 lb) 1090 kg (2403 lb) 1180 kg (2602 lb)
12.4R24 119A8 970 kg (2139 lb) 1060 kg (2337 lb) 1150 kg (2535 lb) 1250 kg (2756 lb) 1360 kg (2998 lb)
13.6R24 121A8 1040 kg (2293 lb) 1140 kg (2513 lb) 1240 kg (2734 lb) 1350 kg (2976 lb) 1450 kg (3197 lb)
14.9R24 126A8 1215 kg (2679 lb) 1320 kg (2910 lb) 1450 kg (3197 lb) 1550 kg (3417 lb) 1700 kg (3748 lb)
12.4R28 121A8 1030 kg (2271 lb) 1120 kg (2469 lb) 1215 kg (2679 lb) 1320 kg (2910 lb) 1450 kg (3197 lb)
13.6R28 123A8 1120 kg (2469 lb) 1220 kg (2690 lb) 1330 kg (2932 lb) 1440 kg (3175 lb) 1550 kg (3417 lb)
280/70R16 * 112A8 620 kg (1367 lb) 675 kg (1488 lb) 735 kg (1620 lb) 790 kg (1742 lb) 850 kg (1874 lb)
280/85R24 115A8 860 kg (1896 lb) 965 kg (2128 lb) 1050 kg (2315 lb) 1130 kg (2491 lb) 1215 kg (2679 lb)
320/85R24 122A8 1065 kg (2348 lb) 1185 kg (2613 lb) 1290 kg (2844 lb) 1395 kg (3076 lb) 1500 kg (3307 lb)
380/70R24 125A8 1180 kg (2602 lb) 1295 kg (2855 lb) 1410 kg (3109 lb) 1520 kg (3351 lb) 1650 kg (3638 lb)
380/85R24 131A8 1380 kg (3042 lb) 1545 kg (3406 lb) 1685 kg (3715 lb) 1815 kg (4001 lb) 1950 kg (4299 lb)
420/70R24 130A8 1375 kg (3031 lb) 1505 kg (3318 lb) 1640 kg (3616 lb) 1770 kg (3902 lb) 1900 kg (4189 lb)
320/85R28 124A8 1135 kg (2502 lb) 1265 kg (2789 lb) 1390 kg (3064 lb) 1500 kg (3307 lb) 1600 kg (3527 lb)
340/85R28 127A8 1240 kg (2734 lb) 1385 kg (3053 lb) 1520 kg (3351 lb) 1640 kg (3616 lb) 1750 kg (3858 lb)

* This tire has a maximum permissible pressure of 240 kPa (2.4 bar; 35 psi) and is therefore also listed in the following table

Tire size 160 kPa 180 kPa 200 kPa 220 kPa 240 kPa
(1.6 bar) (1.8 bar) (2.0 bar) (2.2 bar) (2.4 bar)
(23 psi) (26 psi) (29 psi) (32 psi) (35 psi)
13.6R24 128A8 1450 kg (3197 lb) 1550 kg (3417 lb) 1650 kg (3638 lb) 1700 kg (3748 lb) 1800 kg (3968 lb)
280/70R16 * 112A8 850 kg (1874 lb) 920 kg (2028 lb) 985 kg (2172 lb) 1055 kg (2326 lb) 1120 kg (2469 lb)
340/85R24 130A8 1650 kg (3638 lb) 1715 kg (3781 lb) 1775 kg (3913 lb) 1840 kg (4057 lb) 1900 kg (4189 lb)

Tire size 150 kPa 190 kPa 230 kPa 280 kPa 330 kPa 370 kPa
(1.5 bar) (1.9 bar) (2.3 bar) (2.8 bar) (3.3 bar) (3.7 bar)
(22 psi) (28 psi) (33 psi) (41 psi) (48 psi) (54 psi)
10.5/80-18 10PR 1120 kg (2469 lb) 1290 kg (2844 lb) 1455 kg (3208 lb) 1665 kg (3671 lb) 1835 kg (4045 lb) 1950 kg (4299 lb)

OULXE59,001096F -19-27NOV08-1/1

65-19 021412

PN=128
 Wheel Tread, Tires

Tire Pressure (for 40 km/h; 25 mph) — Rear Wheels

Tire size 60 kPa 80 kPa 100 kPa 120 kPa 140 kPa 160 kPa
(0.6 bar) (0.8 bar) (1.0 bar) (1.2 bar) (1.4 bar) (1.6 bar)
(9 psi) (12 psi) (15 psi) (17 psi) (20 psi) (23 psi)
21.5L-16.1 6PR — 1250 kg (2755 lb) — — — —
16.9-24 6PR — 1215 kg (2679 lb) 1450 kg (3197 lb) 1550 kg (3417 lb) — —
16.9R24 134A8 — 1550 kg (3417 lb) 1700 kg (3748 lb) 1800 kg (3968 lb) 1950 kg (4299 lb) 2120 kg (4674 lb)
18.4-26 6PR — 1500 kg (3307 lb) 1800 kg (3968 lb) — — —
18.4R26 140A8 — 1800 kg (3968 lb) 2000 kg (4409 lb) 2180 kg (4806 lb) 2300 kg (5071 lb) 2500 kg (5512 lb)
16.9R30 137A8 1500 kg (3307 lb) 1660 kg (3660 lb) 1820 kg (4012 lb) 1980 kg (4365 lb) 2140 kg (4718 lb) 2300 kg (5071 lb)
18.4R30 142A8 1720 kg (3792 lb) 1900 kg (4189 lb) 2090 kg (4608 lb) 2280 kg (5027 lb) 2460 kg (5423 lb) 2650 kg (5842 lb)
16.9R34 139A8 1580 kg (3483 lb) 1750 kg (3858 lb) 1920 kg (4233 lb) 2090 kg (4608 lb) 2260 kg (4983 lb) 2430 kg (5357 lb)
18.4R34 144A8 1820 kg (4012 lb) 2010 kg (4431 lb) 2210 kg (4872 lb) 2410 kg (5313 lb) 2600 kg (5732 lb) 2800 kg (6173 lb)
13.6R38 128A8 1300 kg (2866 lb) 1285 kg (2833 lb) 1400 kg (3087 lb) 1600 kg (3527 lb) 1750 kg (3858 lb) 1800 kg (3968 lb)
14.9R38 133A8 1340 kg (2954 lb) 1480 kg (3263 lb) 1630 kg (3594 lb) 1770 kg (3902 lb) 1910 kg (4211 lb) 2060 kg (4542 lb)
16.9R38 141A8 1670 kg (3682 lb) 1850 kg (4079 lb) 2030 kg (4475 lb) 2210 kg (4872 lb) 2400 kg (5291 lb) 2575 kg (5677 lb)
18.4R38 146A8 1950 kg (4299 lb) 2160 kg (4762 lb) 2370 kg (5225 lb) 2575 kg (5677 lb) 2790 kg (6151 lb) 3000 kg (6614 lb)
13.6-46 6PR — — — 1510 kg (3329 lb) 1725 kg (3803 lb) 1835 kg (4046 lb)
420/85R24 137A8 — 1630 kg (3594 lb) 1820 kg (4012 lb) 1980 kg (4365 lb) 2140 kg (4718 lb) 2300 kg (5071 lb)
420/85R30 140A8 1530 kg (3373 lb) 1770 kg (3902 lb) 1980 kg (4365 lb) 2165 kg (4773 lb) 2340 kg (5159 lb) 2500 kg (5517 lb)
460/85R30 145A8 1870 kg (4123 lb) 2100 kg (4630 lb) 2295 kg (5060 lb) 2515 kg (5545 lb) 2715 kg (5986 lb) 2900 kg (6393 lb)
420/85R34 142A8 1625 kg (3583 lb) 1875 kg (4134 lb) 2095 kg (4619 lb) 2295 kg (5060 lb) 2480 kg (5468 lb) 2650 kg (5842 lb)
460/85R34 147A8 1885 kg (4156 lb) 2175 kg (4795 lb) 2430 kg (5357 lb) 2645 kg (5831 lb) 2860 kg (6305 lb) 3075 kg (6779 lb)
480/70R34 143A8 1760 kg (3880 lb) 1970 kg (4343 lb) 2155 kg (4751 lb) 2360 kg (5203 lb) 2550 kg (5622 lb) 2725 kg (6008 lb)
520/70R34 148A8 2030 kg (4475 lb) 2260 kg (4983 lb) 2470 kg (5445 lb) 2680 kg (5908 lb) 2900 kg (6393 lb) 3150 kg (6945 lb)
340/85R38 133A8 — 1470 kg (3241 lb) 1615 kg (3561 lb) 1765 kg (3891 lb) 1910 kg (4211 lb) 2060 kg (4542 lb)
420/85R38 144A8 1715 kg (3781 lb) 1980 kg (4365 lb) 2215 kg (4883 lb) 2420 kg (5335 lb) 2610 kg (5754 lb) 2800 kg (6173 lb)
460/85R38 149A8 1990 kg (4387 lb) 2300 kg (5071 lb) 2570 kg (5666 lb) 2800 kg (6173 lb) 3025 kg (6669 lb) 3250 kg (7165 lb)
480/70R38 145A8 1870 kg (4123 lb) 2100 kg (4630 lb) 2295 kg (5060 lb) 2500 kg (5512 lb) 2700 kg (5953 lb) 2900 kg (6393 lb)
520/70R38 150A8 2160 kg (4762 lb) 2380 kg (5247 lb) 2600 kg (5732 lb) 2820 kg (6217 lb) 3035 kg (6691 lb) 3350 kg (7386 lb)
600/65R38 153A8 2260 kg (4983 lb) 2520 kg (5556 lb) 2805 kg (6184 lb) 3085 kg (6801 lb) 3370 kg (7430 lb) 3650 kg (8047 lb)

Tire size 120 kPa 160 kPa 200 kPa 240 kPa
(1.2 bar) (1.6 bar) (2.0 bar) (2.4 bar)
(17 psi) (23 psi) (29 psi) (35 psi)
320/90R42 139A8 1700 kg (3748 lb) 2060 kg (4542 lb) 2240 kg (4938 lb) 2430 kg (5357 lb)

OULXE59,0010970 -19-27NOV08-1/1

65-20 021412

PN=129
 Wheel Tread, Tires

Tire Combinations (Tractors with Front-Wheel Drive)

The size ratio of the front wheels to the rear ones is the tractor's electronics must be recalibrated
precisely determined in order to produce a positive front by your John Deere dealer.
wheel lead of between 1.5 and 4%. Otherwise the tires
will become deformed or suffer undue wear. To ascertain Calculate the overall transmission ratio using the following
the correct ratio when changing tires, proceed as follows: formula:
Ascertain tractor data: A1 * I1 * I3 * 100
I=
1. Transmission ratio of the differential gear pair. This
A2 * I2 * 102.75
information is displayed on the transmission serial
number plate. The following pairs are possible:
A1 = Rolling circumference of front tires
Gear pair Transmission ratio
A2 = Rolling circumference of rear tires
47/10 4,700
I1 = Rear axle ratio (7.0714)
53/10 5,300
I2 = Transmission ratio of front axle
51/9 5,667
I3 = Transmission ratio of the differential gear pair

2. Transmission ratio of front axle. This figure is Calculated transmission Transmission ratio of the required
displayed on the front axle serial number plate. The ratio gear pair
following ratios are possible: (corresponds to a pos. front (corresponds to desired average value
wheel lead of 1.5 - 4.0%) of pos. front wheel lead)
• 13,125
1,428 — 1,451 1,446
• 15,692
1,452 — 1,479 1,465
3. Transmission ratio of gear pair for front-wheel drive 1,480 — 1,514 1,497
axle output. This information is displayed on the 1,515 — 1,548 1,532
transmission serial number plate. The following ratios
1,549 — 1,580 1,564
are possible:
1,581 — 1,614 1,597
• 1,446 1,615 — 1,645 1,625
• 1,465 1,646 — 1,672 1,658
• 1,497 1,673 — 1,711 1,692
• 1,532 1,712 — 1,739 1,725
• 1,564
• 1,597 1,740 — 1,779 1,760
• 1,625 1,780 — 1,812 1,795
• 1,658 1,813 — 1,853 1,833
• 1,692 1,854 — 1,886 1,870
• 1,725 1,887 — 1,926 1,907
• 1,760 1,927 — 1,964 1,943
• 1,795
• 1,833 1,965 — 2,011 1,990
• 1,870 2,012 — 2,062 2,028
• 1,907
• 1,943 Ascertain the gear pair that is appropriate for the overall
• 1,990 transmission ratio.
• 2,028 Sample calculation
Ascertain tire data:
The intention is to fit a 6430 tractor with 460/65R38 and
1. Select tires with suitable load-bearing capability. 340/85R28 tires, made by a certain manufacturer.
2. Select tires appropriate to the tractor's top speed. 1. The transmission ratio of the differential gear pair is
5.667.
3. From the manual, ascertain the rolling circumference
of the tire desired for the rear wheel. 2. The transmission ratio of the front axle is 15.692.
4. From the manual, ascertain the rolling circumference 3. The transmission ratio of the gear pair for the front
of the tire desired for the front wheel. wheel drive axle is 1.870.
Ascertain the following data: 4. The rolling circumference of the tire on the rear wheel
is 5247 mm (206.6 in.).
IMPORTANT: If the new rear tires have a higher SRI
(speed/radius index) than the previous ones,
Continued on next page OULXE59,0010929 -19-21AUG07-1/2

65-21 021412

PN=130
 Wheel Tread, Tires

3882 * 7,0714 * 5,667 * 100

5. The rolling circumference of the tire on the front wheel
= 1,839
is 3882 mm (152.8 in.).
5247 * 15,692 * 102,75
6. Calculate the overall transmission ratio.

The gear pair that is required must have a ratio of 1.833.

OULXE59,0010929 -19-21AUG07-2/2

Check the Oil Sight-Glass (when the Tire Combination has been Changed)
IMPORTANT: If a different tire combination is factory. Ascertain the indicator letter (A-G) of the existing
selected, or new rear tires are selected with oil sight-glass by referring to Table 1.
an SRI (speed/radius index) higher than the
previous ones, the tractor's electronics must be Ascertain the indicator letter of the required sight-glass by
recalibrated by your John Deere dealer. finding the SRI of the desired tire combination in Table 1. If
a new glass is required, refer to Table 2 for the part number.
Refer to “Specifications” section for the SRI (speed/radius
index) of the tires supplied with the tractor when it left the
SRI of front tires SRI (speed/radius index) of rear tires
525 625 675 700 725 730 750 775 800 825 875

390 D — — — — — — — — — —
425 — B F G G G — — — — —
525 — D C C B B A F G G —
550 — E D C C C B A F G —
575 — — D D C C C B A F G
600 — — E D D D C C B A G
625 — — — E D D D C C B F
775 — — — — — — — — — — D

Indicator letter Part number

A AL175219
B AL176110
C AL176111
D AL176112
E AL176113
F AL176114
G AL176115
OU12401,0001815 -19-25AUG07-1/1

65-22 021412

PN=131
 Additional Equipment
Selective Control Valves
The tractor may be equipped with three different types of
selective control valves: 100 series, 200 series or 350
series.

LX1037195 —UN—17MAY06
100 Series control valves provide the functions Raise and
Lower plus a Float Position.
Besides these functions, 200 Series control valves provide
a lock function (A) which holds the control lever in the
Raise or Lower position until it is moved manually.
350 Series control valves also have an additional lock
function (B), which holds the control lever in the Raise
or Lower position until the pressure in the oil circuit has
reached a predetermined value (e.g. when the remote A—Lock function 1 C—No lock function
B—Lock function 2
control cylinder has reached its end position).
Neither locking function is activated in position (C). The
control lever returns to neutral as soon as it is released. caused by leakage (e.g. retracting cylinder) when the
engine is shut off. 100 Series selective control valves
If an implement (e.g. hydraulic cylinder) is connected, are NOT equipped with such a valve. On 350 Series
pressure connection (e.g. extending cylinder) has to be selective control valves, the likelihood of leakage is further
connected to the lower coupler. With 200 Series selective diminished.
control valves, a valve prevents rapid loss of pressure
OU12401,0001B1B -19-30JAN09-1/1

Adjustment of Pressure Limit at Selective

Control Valves (350 Series)
NOTE: All selective control valves are factory adjusted
to 18000 kPa (180 bar; 2610 psi).

LX1037196 —UN—17MAY06
If the selective control valve in lock function switches off
too early (control lever goes to neutral too early), or if it
switches off too late or not at all (lever goes to neutral too
late or not at all), proceed as follows:
1. If equipped, disconnect hydraulic hoses at the
connectors.
2. Engage the locking function (A) (as far as it will go
to the right) and move flow control valve (B) to the A—Lock function C—Plug
mid-position. B—Flow-control valve

3. Take out plug (C) and insert a 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) hex.
socket key.
NOTE: One full turn changes the pressure by approx.
4. Start the engine and turn the screw clockwise as far 2000 kPa (20 bar; 290 psi).
as it will go.
5. Move SCV control lever to the raise or lower position 7. Re-install the plug.
(the control lever remains in the raise or lower position).
6. Turn the screw counter-clockwise until the control
lever returns to neutral.
OU12401,0001B1C -19-30JAN09-1/1

70-1 021412

PN=132
 Additional Equipment

Levers for Mechanical Selective Control

Valves
Control lever positions
The control lever has four positions.

LX1053325 —UN—07NOV11
(A) - Retract
The remote cylinder retracts when the lever is moved to
the Retract position.
(B) - Extend
The remote cylinder extends when the lever is moved to
the Extend position.
(C) - Neutral
CAUTION: With 100 Series selective control
The remote cylinder is held in place when the lever is in valves, the extend and retract functions have a
Neutral. mechanical detent. When starting the engine,
(D) - Float make sure that the control levers are in neutral.

When the lever is in the Float position (i.e. piston moves

freely inside remote cylinder), the mounted implement
follows the ground contours.
NOTE: If additional external valves are used, move
the control lever to neutral when shutting off
each hydraulic function.
OU12401,0001816 -19-03NOV11-1/2

Transport lock
With locks (A) each lever for selective control valves can
be locked in neutral position (transport lock) or released
for all functions.

LX1053326 —UN—07NOV11
CAUTION: Use locks (A) to lock the control
levers when driving on roads and whenever the
control levers are in neutral because they are not
required. If this is not done, the control levers
may be inadvertently actuated while the tractor is
in motion, which could lead to serious accidents.

OU12401,0001816 -19-03NOV11-2/2

70-2 021412

PN=133
 Additional Equipment

Multi-Function Lever (Mechanical)

Multi-function lever (A) permits two SCVs to be operated
at the same time. Button (B) enables other functions to be
carried out.

LX1043871 —UN—17SEP07
Gear shift buttons (C) allow the gears at the transmission
to be shifted. Slide control (D) locks the lever.
Pulling lever (A) back raises the front loader. Pushing
the lever forward until resistance is reached lowers the
front loader. If the lever is pushed forward beyond the
resistance, it engages in a detent and the front loader is in
its float position.
Moving the lever to the left makes the loader bucket tip
up. Moving the lever to the right makes the loader bucket
dump.

CAUTION: The multi-function lever must be locked

LX1054600 —UN—10OCT11
when driving on roads and whenever the front
loader is not required. Move the multi-function
lever to neutral position and lock it using slide
control (D). Make sure that the multi-function lever
can no longer move. Otherwise, the front loader
may be inadvertently actuated while the tractor is
in motion, which could lead to serious accidents.

A — Multi-Function Lever C—Gear Shift Switches

B—Button for 3rd Function D—Transport Lock Slide
Control

OU12401,0001817 -19-02NOV11-1/1

70-3 021412

PN=134
 Additional Equipment

Mechanical Multi-Function Lever with Front-Loader Dampening

Basic functions:
• Lever to rear = Raise front loader
• Lever to front as far as perceptible resistance = Lower
front loader
• Lever to front beyond perceptible resistance (detent) =

LX1053319 —UN—10OCT11
Front loader in float position
• Lever to left = Bucket tips up
• Lever to right = Bucket tips down
Advanced functions and programming:
Multi-function lever (A) permits two control valves
(M-ICVs) to be operated at the same time. A third control
valve is actuated via rocker switch (H), permitting an
additional function to be controlled.
If Memo™ button (B) is pressed during raising or lowering,
the front loader will only move as far as the preset position.
Pressing buttons (E) and (F) actuates the diverter valves

LX1053320 —UN—10OCT11
of the implement, permitting additional functions to be
controlled.
NOTE: For more information, see implement operator's
manual. Front-loader dampening must be
activated before it can be used.

Front-loader dampening is switched on and off at button

(C). When front-loader dampening is switched on, the
LED in button (C) lights up.
Gear-shift switches (D) allow the gears at the transmission
to be shifted.

LX1054600 —UN—10OCT11
CAUTION: When the front loader is not in use,
the multi-function lever must be locked. To do
this, turn locking ring (G) and check that the
multi-function lever cannot be moved. If this is
not done, the front loader may be inadvertently
actuated while the tractor is in motion, which
could lead to serious accidents.

Activate and de-activate front-loader dampening

A—Multi-Function Lever E—Button, Diverter Valve 1 on
1. Hold button (C) and then switch on the ignition. B—Memo™ Button (not for Front Implement (not for
2. Hold button (C) for another 5 seconds at least until the North America) North America)
C—Button for Activating F— Button, Diverter Valve 2 on
LED in the button starts to flash. Front-Loader Dampening Front Implement (not for
3. Release the button and press it again within 5 seconds D—Gear Shift Switches North America)
to gain access to the programming mode. G—Locking Ring (Transport
4. The current programming of front-loader dampening Lock)
H—Raise/Lower Rocker Switch
is shown as follows:
LED off all the time ==> Front-loader dampening
de-activated 6. To leave the programming mode and save the setting,
LED on all the time ==> Front-loader dampening press any button on the multi-function lever or switch
activated off the ignition.
5. Press button (C) to activate or de-activate front-loader
dampening.
OULXA64,0002874 -19-04OCT11-1/1

70-4 021412

PN=135
 Additional Equipment

Rate of Cylinder Operation

Flow control valves (A) can be used to regulate the rate
at which remote cylinders extend and retract (raise and
lower). When lowering, make sure that the SCV control
lever is NOT moved to float position.

LX1037211 —UN—21OCT05
IMPORTANT: Full extension and retraction of a remote
cylinder must require more than 1.5 seconds.
Faster speeds may cause damage.

OU12401,0001CD9 -19-27MAY10-1/1

Couplers

CAUTION: The hydraulic system has a maximum

system pressure of 20000 kPa (200 bar; 2900
psi). For your own protection and to assure

LX1043872 —UN—17SEP07
proper functioning of the system, use only
genuine John Deere parts.

There are two variants of coupler, both of which operate

as breakaway couplers and comply with ISO Norm 5675.
On the Standard version, the connection can be broken
even if there is still pressure on the implement side. On
the DeLuxe version, the connection can be broken even DeLuxe couplers
if there is still pressure on the implement side and/or at
the SCV.
NOTE: When the control lever is pushed forward (or to
If a malfunction or accident causes the hose to break
the right in the case of the multi-function lever),
loose from the coupler, the oil flow through the coupler is
the pressure is applied to the upper coupler.
stopped immediately.
To connect the hose union, press it firmly into the coupler. To disconnect the hose, give it a firm pull.
OU12401,0001818 -19-25MAY10-1/1

Hose Unions
The hose unions used must comply with ISO standards.
Dimension (A) must be between 23.66 and 23.74 mm
(0.931 and 0.934 in.). LX006613 —UN—15AUG94

Dimension (B) must be at least 24 mm (0.945 in.).

LX,OZUSAT004842 -19-02AUG93-1/1

70-5 021412

PN=136
 Additional Equipment

Maximum Permissible Oil Withdrawal

To operate large hydraulic cylinders such as those used on
tipping trailers, 10 liters (2.6 U.S. gal.) of oil may be drawn
from the transmission case through the connecting lines.

LX1043820 —UN—11JUL07
This figure applies when the oil in the transmission case
is at the minimum mark (A) on the sight-glass. If the oil
level is at the maximum mark (B), a further 5 liters (1.3
U.S. gal.) may be withdrawn.
Never perform heavy jobs such as towing, operating a
PTO or driving fast when withdrawal results in the oil level
dropping below the minimum mark.
If required, a further 10 liters (2.6 U.S. gal.) may be added
to the transmission case; this increases the amount that A—Minimum mark C—Mark, 10 liters (2.6 U.S. gal.)
B—Maximum mark above max.
may be withdrawn accordingly. D—Mark, 10 liters (2.6 U.S. gal.)
below min.
During oil withdrawal, the tractor should not be inclined in
any direction by more than 18°. If the tractor is inclined by
more than 18°, only a correspondingly lower quantity of
oil may be withdrawn. For refilling, use only John Deere HY-GARD™
Transmission and Hydraulic Oil or its equivalent.
HY-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company.
OULXE59,00109DC -19-09DEC09-1/1

Oil Withdrawal with Hydraulic Motor

IMPORTANT: Never regulate the flow rate by
means of an external valve. Always use
flow control valves (A).

LX1043815 —UN—10JUL07
Maximum obtainable flow of transmission/hydraulic oil
is dependent on the size of the hydraulic pump installed
on the tractor.
Pump size Flow rate
23 cm3 (1.4 cu.in.) 54 L/min (14.3 gpm)
27 cm3 (1.6 cu.in.) 63 L/min (16.6 gpm)
35 cm3 (2.1 cu.in.) 80 L/min (21.1 gpm)

IMPORTANT: Do not move the control lever to

Shut off engine. Connect the hydraulic hose from the the neutral position, as this may result
hydraulic motor. Comply with the symbols on the couplers. in back-pressure causing damage to the
Start the engine. Move the control lever to lower position. hydraulic motor and hoses.
To switch off the hydraulic motor, move the control lever
to the float position. Shut off the engine and take out the
hydraulic hose.
OU12401,0001AFC -19-27NOV08-1/1

Instructions on Operating a Hydraulic Motor

A hydraulic motor must be operated only with a Series If necessary, engine speed can be increased to give a
350 selective control valve. higher rate of flow.
Never operate implements constantly at maximum system
pressure (20000 kPa, 200 bar, 2900 psi), as this may
cause the hydraulic system to overheat.
OULXE59,00109D5 -19-06DEC09-1/1

70-6 021412

PN=137
 Additional Equipment

Pressure-Free Return Circuit

This connection ensures pressure-free oil return.
Ask your John Deere dealer for the relevant accessories.

LX1038384 —UN—06JUN06
OU12401,0001429 -19-05JUN06-1/1

70-7 021412

PN=138
 Additional Equipment

Drawbar
The drawbar is used to pull drawn equipment of all types,
particularly PTO-driven implements.
The drawbar hitch point is located so as to increase the

LX1037213 —UN—21OCT05
rear axle load and at the same time slightly reduce load
on the front axle.
Besides having a variable swinging range, the drawbar
can also be adjusted lengthwise.
Maximum permissible static vertical loads and towable
loads are stated in the “Specifications” section.
NOTE: Drawbar components that are subject to wear
have to be checked every 250 hours (see “Service
/ Every 250 Hours”). Replace if necessary.
OU12401,0001819 -19-25AUG07-1/1

Proper Use of Drawbar

IMPORTANT: Comply with local traffic regulations
when using the drawbar. Use suitable,
approved hitch pins only. Combine
drawbars as shown only.

LX1036188 —UN—02MAY05
OU12401,0001205 -19-02MAY05-1/1

Lengthwise Adjustment of Drawbar

The swinging drawbar can be adjusted to four different
positions:
250 mm (9.8 in.), 350 mm (13.8 in.), 400 mm (15.7 in.)
and 550 mm (21.7 in.).
LX000460 —UN—09AUG94
These lengths determine the distance from the end of the
PTO shaft to the attachment point of the swinging drawbar.
1. Remove hex. stopper (A).
2. Remove locking pin (B).
3. Shift drawbar (C) to desired position and reinstall
locking pin.
4. Tighten hex. stopper (A) to 250 Nm (185 lb-ft).
AG,OU12401,224 -19-07APR00-1/1

70-8 021412

PN=139
 Additional Equipment

Use Safety Chain

If a drawn implement becomes detached from the drawbar,
a safety chain will help to keep control of the implement.
Pass chain through support (A). Attach chain to point (B).

LX1024721 —UN—10OCT00
Leave only enough slack in the chain to permit turning.
Do not use support (A) as attachment point.
Ask your John Deere dealer to provide a sufficiently
strong chain for your implement. Do not use the chain to
tow implements.
Replace chain if any parts are damaged.

A—Support chain B—Attachment point

LX1024722 —UN—10OCT00
OU12401,000181A -19-25AUG07-1/1

70-9 021412

PN=140
 Additional Equipment

Vandalism Protection

LX1043873 —UN—17SEP07

LX1043874 —UN—17SEP07
LX1043875 —UN—17SEP07

LX1043876 —UN—17SEP07
LX1043877 —UN—17SEP07

A—Lockable fuel tank cap C—Lockable hood E—Instrument panel glass

B—Lockable side panel D—Lockable filler neck

OU12401,000181B -19-25AUG07-1/1

70-10 021412

PN=141
 Additional Equipment

Front Loader Installation - Front Loader Brackets

CC1028344 —UN—10AUG06
Hardware for John Deere front loader brackets
Item Description Width across flats Torque Standard Thread Length Identification /
Grade
Weight of front
A loader bracket, 100 - - - - - -
kg (220 lb)

- - - - 21.4 x 22 x -
B Washers (7 used)
5 mm
550 N•m (406 320 mm
C Cap screws (2 used) 30 mm ISO4014 M20 x 2.5 10.9
lb.-ft.) (12.6 in.)
550 N•m (406 45 mm (1.77
D Cap screws (5 used) 30 mm ISO4017 M20 x 2.5 10.9
lb.-ft.) in.)
Nuts (7 used) 30 mm - ISO4161 M20 x 2.5 - 10

Using a suitable hoist, position the front loader brackets to the specified torque. Check the torque regularly; see
on the main frame of the tractor and tighten the screws Section 85, Lubrication and Periodic Service.

Continued on next page OULXBER,0001B55 -19-15NOV11-1/2

70-11 021412

PN=142
 Additional Equipment

as shown in the illustration above. Comply also with

A front loader checked and approved by John Deere
Operator's Manual and Installation Instructions of the front
is available for purchase. When installing John Deere
loader.
front-loader brackets, use appropriate hardware only,
OULXBER,0001B55 -19-15NOV11-2/2

70-12 021412

PN=143
 Transport
Transporting the Tractor and that doors, roof hatch (if equipped) and windows are
closed and latched.
A disabled tractor is best transported on a flatbed carrier.
Before transporting the tractor on a low truck or flat-bed
rail wagon, make sure that the engine hood is secured
OU12401,00009BF -19-01JUL02-1/1

Towing the Tractor

CAUTION: Never tow the tractor at a speed

greater than 10 km/h (6 mph).

LX1029218 —UN—11APR03
When the engine is not running, more force is
required to turn the steering wheel and pedal
travel is longer (no hydraulic assistance).

Shift both range and reverser levers to neutral position.

Make sure that the transmission oil level is between the
marks on the sight-glass. If the tractor is to be towed with
the front wheels raised, observe the following points:
• Never raise the wheels more than 30 cm (12 in.). capable of running, disconnect universal-jointed
• For every 15 cm (6 in.) that the front wheels are raised, drive shaft by taking out screws (A). This
add 4 liters (1 U.S. gal.) of transmission/hydraulic oil prevents excessive wear on the tires.
to the transmission.
• When towing is completed, drain the excess oil.
IMPORTANT: If the engine is capable of running,
switch off front-wheel drive. If the engine is not
OU12401,00013CF -19-25MAR06-1/1

Driving on Public Roads

Check that the lights are working properly before driving
on public roads.
Use the coupler to lock the brake pedals together.

LX1042996 —UN—09JUL07

OU12401,0001786 -19-05JUL07-1/1

75-1 021412

PN=144
 Fuel, Lubricants, Hydraulic Oil and Coolant
Diesel Fuel
Consult your local fuel distributor for properties of the Sulfur content
diesel fuel available in your area.
In general, diesel fuels are blended to satisfy the low
• Diesel fuel quality and sulfur content must comply with
existing emissions regulations for the area in which the
temperature requirements of the geographical area in engine operates.
which they are marketed.
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 0.1%
Diesel fuels specified to EN 590 or ASTM D975 are (1000 ppm) is STRONGLY recommended.
recommended. • Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content 0.2% (2000 ppm)
to 0.5% (5000 ppm) results in REDUCED oil and filter
Required fuel properties service intervals.
In all cases, the fuel shall meet the following properties: • BEFORE using diesel fuel with sulfur content greater
than 0.5% (5000 ppm), contact your John Deere dealer.
Cetane number of 45 minimum. Cetane number greater • DO NOT use diesel fuel with sulfur content greater than
than 50 is preferred, especially for temperatures below 1.0%
-20°C (-4°F) or elevations above 1500 m (5000 ft).
IMPORTANT: Do not mix used engine oil or any other
Cold Filter Plugging Point (CFPP) below the expected type of lubricating oil with diesel fuel.
low temperature OR Cloud Point at least 5°C (9°F) below
the expected low temperature. IMPORTANT: Improper fuel additive usage may
cause damage on fuel injection equipment
Fuel lubricity should pass a minimum level of 3100 grams of diesel motors.
as measured by ASTM D6078 or maximum scar diameter
of 0.45 mm as measured by ASTM D6079 or ISO 12156-1.
OU12401,00013D9 -19-03APR06-1/1

Lubricity of Diesel Fuel

Most diesel fuels manufactured in the United States, If fuel of low or unknown lubricity is used, add John Deere
Canada, and the European Union have adequate lubricity Fuel-Protect Diesel Fuel Conditioner (or equivalent) at
to ensure proper operation and durability of fuel injection the specified concentration.
system components. However, diesel fuels manufactured
in some areas of the world may lack the necessary lubricity. Lubricity of Biodiesel Fuel
IMPORTANT: Make sure the diesel fuel used Fuel lubricity can improve significantly with biodiesel
in your machine demonstrates good blends up to B20 (20% biodiesel). Further increase in
lubricity characteristics. lubricity is limited for biodiesel blends greater than B20.

Fuel lubricity should pass a maximum scar diameter of

0.45 mm as measured by ASTM D6079 or ISO 12156-1.
DX,FUEL5 -19-14APR11-1/1

80-1 021412

PN=145
 Fuel, Lubricants, Hydraulic Oil and Coolant

Handling and Storing Diesel Fuel

CAUTION: Reduce the risk of fire. Handle fuel When using biodiesel fuel, the fuel filter may require more
carefully. DO NOT fill the fuel tank when engine frequent replacement due to premature plugging.
is running. DO NOT smoke while you fill the
Check engine oil level daily prior to starting engine. A
fuel tank or service the fuel system.
rising oil level may indicate fuel dilution of the engine oil.
Fill the fuel tank at the end of each day's operation to IMPORTANT: The fuel tank is vented through the
prevent water condensation and freezing during cold filler cap. If a new filler cap is required, always
weather. replace it with an original vented cap.
Keep all storage tanks as full as practicable to minimize
When fuel is stored for an extended period or if there is a
condensation.
slow turnover of fuel, add a fuel conditioner to stabilize the
Ensure that all fuel tank caps and covers are installed fuel and prevent water condensation. Contact your fuel
properly to prevent moisture from entering. Monitor water supplier for recommendations.
content of the fuel regularly.
DX,FUEL4 -19-14APR11-1/1

80-2 021412

PN=146
 Fuel, Lubricants, Hydraulic Oil and Coolant

Biodiesel Fuel
Biodiesel is a fuel comprised of mono-alkyl esters of long
When using biodiesel fuel, the engine oil level must be
chain fatty acids derived from vegetable oils or animal
checked daily. If oil becomes diluted with fuel, shorten oil
fats. Biodiesel blends are biodiesel mixed with petroleum
change intervals. Refer to Diesel Engine Oil and Filter
diesel fuel on a volume basis.
Service Intervals for more details regarding biodiesel and
Biodiesel users in the U.S. are strongly encouraged to engine oil change intervals.
purchase biodiesel blends from a BQ-9000 Certified
The following must be considered when using biodiesel
Marketer and sourced from a BQ-9000 Accredited
blends up to B20:
Producer (as certified by the National Biodiesel Board).
Certified Marketers and Accredited Producers can be • Cold weather flow degradation
found at the following website: http://www.bq-9000.org. • Stability and storage issues (moisture absorption,
oxidation, microbial growth)
While 5% blends are preferred (B5), biodiesel
concentrations up to a 20% blend (B20) in petroleum • Possible filter restriction and plugging (usually a problem
when first switching to biodiesel on used engines.)
diesel fuel can be used in all John Deere engines.
Biodiesel blends up to B20 can be used ONLY if the • Possible fuel leakage through seals and hoses
biodiesel (100% biodiesel or B100) meets ASTM D6751 • Possible reduction of service life of engine components
(US), EN 14214 (EU), or equivalent specification. Expect The following must also be considered when using
a 2% reduction in power and a 3% reduction in fuel biodiesel blends above B20.
economy when using B20.
• Possible coking and/or blocked injector nozzles,
John Deere approved fuel conditioners containing resulting in power loss and engine misfire if John
detergent/dispersant additives are recommended when Deere approved fuel conditioners containing
using lower biodiesel blends, but are required when using detergent/dispersant additives are not used
blends of B20 or greater. • Possible crankcase oil dilution, requiring more frequent
oil changes
John Deere engines can also operate on biodiesel blends
above B20 (up to 100% biodiesel) ONLY if the biodiesel • Possible corrosion of fuel injection equipment
meets the EN 14214 specification (primarily available in • Possible lacquering and/or seizure of internal
components
Europe). Engines operating on biodiesel blends above
B20 may not fully comply with all applicable emissions • Possible formation of sludge and sediments
regulations. Expect up to a 12% reduction in power • Possible thermal oxidation of fuel at elevated
temperatures
and an 18% reduction in fuel economy when using
100% biodiesel. John Deere approved fuel conditioners • Possible elastomer seal and gasket material
degradation ( primarily an issue with older engines)
containing detergent/dispersant additives are required.
• Possible compatibility issues with other materials
The petroleum diesel portion of biodiesel blends must (including copper, lead, zinc, tin, brass, and bronze)
meet the requirements of ASTM D975 (US) or EN 590 used in fuel systems and fuel handling equipment
(EU) commercial standards. • Possible reduction in water separator efficiency
• Potential high acid levels within fuel system
Biodiesel blends up to B20 must be used within 90 days of • Possible damage to paint if exposed to biodiesel
the date of biodiesel manufacture. Biodiesel blends from
B21 to B100 must be used within 45 days of the date of IMPORTANT: Raw pressed vegetable oils are
biodiesel manufacture. NOT acceptable for use as fuel in any
concentration in John Deere engines. Their
Request a certificate of analysis from your fuel distributor use could cause engine failure.
to ensure that the fuel is compliant with the above
specifications.
DX,FUEL7 -19-20APR11-1/1

80-3 021412

PN=147
 Fuel, Lubricants, Hydraulic Oil and Coolant

Diesel Engine Break-In Oil

New engines are filled at the factory with either John • API Service Classification CC
Deere Break-In™ or John Deere Break-In Plus™ • ACEA Oil Sequence E2
Engine Oil. During the break-in period, add John Deere • ACEA Oil Sequence E1
Break-In™ or Break-In Plus ™ Engine Oil, respectively,
as needed to maintain the specified oil level. IMPORTANT: Do not use Plus-50™ II, Plus-50 or
engine oils meeting any of the following for the
Operate the engine under various conditions, particularly initial break-in of a new or rebuilt engine:
heavy loads with minimal idling, to help seat engine API CJ-4 ACEA E9
components properly.
API CI-4 PLUS ACEA E7
If John Deere Break-In Engine Oil is used during the initial API CI-4 ACEA E6
operation of a new or rebuilt engine, change the oil and API CH-4 ACEA E5
filter at a maximum of 250 hours.
API CG-4 ACEA E4
If John Deere Break-In Plus Engine Oil is used, change API CF-4 ACEA E3
the oil and filter at a minimum of 100 hours and a API CF-2
maximum equal to the interval specified for John Deere API CF
Plus-50™ II or Plus-50 oil.
After engine overhaul, fill the engine with either John These oils will not allow the engine to
Deere Break-In™ or Break-In Plus™ Engine Oil. break in properly.

If John Deere Break-In or Break-In Plus Engine Oil is John Deere Break-In Plus™ Engine Oil can be used for
not available, use an SAE 10W-30 viscosity grade diesel all John Deere diesel engines at all emission certification
engine oil meeting one of the following and change the oil levels.
and filter at a maximum of 100 hours of operation:
After the break-in period, use John Deere Plus-50™
• API Service Classification CE II, John Deere Plus-50, or other diesel engine oil as
• API Service Classification CD recommended in this manual.
Break-In is a trademark of Deere & Company.
Break-In Plus is a trademark of Deere & Company
Plus-50 is a trademark of Deere & Company.
DX,ENOIL4 -19-20APR11-1/1

80-4 021412

PN=148
 Fuel, Lubricants, Hydraulic Oil and Coolant

Diesel Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals

The oil and filter service intervals in the table below • DO NOT use diesel fuel with sulfur content greater than
should be used as guidelines. Actual service intervals 1.0% (10000 ppm).
also depend on operation and maintenance practices. It
is suggested to use oil analysis to determine the actual Oil types (premium or standard) in the table include:
useful life of the oil to aid in selection of the proper oil and • Premium oils include John Deere PLUS-50™, ACEA
filter service interval. Oil and filter service intervals are E7 or ACEA E6 oils.
based on a combination of oil pan capacity, type of engine • Standard oils include John Deere TORQ-GARD
oil and filter used, and sulfur content of the diesel fuel. SUPREME™, API CI-4 PLUS, API CI-4, ACEA E5 or
Diesel fuel sulfur level will affect engine oil and filter ACEA E4 oils.
service intervals. Higher fuel sulfur levels reduce oil and Use of lower specification oils in Stage III A engines may
filter service intervals as shown in the table: result in premature engine failure. The 500 hour extended
oil and filter change interval is allowed if the following
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 0.1% conditions are met:
(1000 ppm) is strongly recommended.
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content 0.2% (2000 ppm) • Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 0.2%
to 0.5% (5000 ppm) may result in REDUCED oil and (2000 ppm).
filter service intervals as shown in the table. • Use of premium oil John Deere PLUS-50, ACEA E7 or
• BEFORE using diesel fuel with sulfur content greater ACEA E6 and approved John Deere oil filter
than 0.5% (5000 ppm), contact your John Deere dealer.
Service interval
Sulfur content of fuel Less than 0.2% (2000 ppm)
Standard oil 250 hours
Premium oil 500 hours
Sulfur content of fuel 0.2% to 0.5% (2000 to 5000 ppm)
Standard oil 200 hours
Premium oil 300 hours
Sulfur content of fuel 0.5% to 1.0% (5000 to 10000 ppm)
Standard oil Contact your John Deere dealer
Premium oil Contact your John Deere dealer

PLUS-50 is a trademark of Deere & Company

TORQ-GARD SUPREME is a trademark of Deere & Company
OU12401,00013D8 -19-03APR06-1/1

80-5 021412

PN=149
 Fuel, Lubricants, Hydraulic Oil and Coolant

Transmission and Hydraulic Oil

Use oil with a viscosity based on the expected air
temperature range during the period between oil changes.
The following oils are preferred:
• John Deere HY-GARD™
• John Deere Low Viscosity HY-GARD™
Other oils may be used if they meet one of the following:
• John Deere Standard JDM J20C
• John Deere Standard JDM J20D
Use John Deere BIO-HY-GARD II™1 or BIO-HY-GARD™1
when a biodegradable fluid is required.

LX1033631 —UN—29APR04
HY-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company.
BIO-HY-GARD II is a trademark of Deere & Company.
BIO-HY-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company.
1
BIO-HY-GARD II meets or exceeds the minimum biodegradability
of 80 % within 21 days according to CEC L-33-A-93 test method.
BIO-HY-GARD meets or exceeds the minimum biodegradability of 80
% within 21 days according to CEC L-33-T-82 test method. These
oils should not be mixed with mineral oils because this reduces the
biodegradability and makes proper oil recycling impossible.
LX,ANTI2 -19-30APR04-1/1

80-6 021412

PN=150
 Fuel, Lubricants, Hydraulic Oil and Coolant

Front-Wheel Drive Axle Oil

Use oil with a viscosity based on the expected air
temperature range during the period between oil changes.
The following oil is recommended:
John Deere HY-GARD™
Other oils may be used if they meet the following:
John Deere Standard JDM J20C
Use one of the following oils when a biodegradable fluid is
required:
John Deere BIO-HY-GARD II™1 or BIO-HY-GARD™1

LX1033632 —UN—29APR04
HY-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company.
BIO-HY-GARD II is a trademark of Deere & Company.
BIO-HY-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company.
1
BIO-HY-GARD II meets or exceeds the minimum biodegradability
of 80 % within 21 days according to CEC L-33-A-93 test method.
BIO-HY-GARD meets or exceeds the minimum biodegradability of 80
% within 21 days according to CEC L-33-T-82 test method. These
oils should not be mixed with mineral oils because this reduces the
biodegradability and makes proper oil recycling impossible.
OU12401,0001313 -19-13OCT05-1/1

80-7 021412

PN=151
 Fuel, Lubricants, Hydraulic Oil and Coolant

Grease
Use grease based on NLGI consistency numbers and the
expected air temperature range during the service interval.
John Deere SD Polyurea Grease is preferred.
The following greases are also recommended:
• John Deere HD Lithium Complex Grease
• John Deere HD Water Resistant Grease
• John DeereGREASE-GARD™
Other greases may be used if they meet the following:
• NLGI Performance Classification GC-LB
IMPORTANT: Some types of grease thickeners are not

TS1673 —UN—31OCT03
compatible with others. Consult your grease
supplier before mixing different types of grease.

Greases for Air Temperature Ranges

GREASE-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company

DX,GREA1 -19-14APR11-1/1

Mixing of Lubricants
In general, avoid mixing different brands or types of oil. Consult your John Deere dealer to obtain specific
Oil manufacturers blend additives in their oils to meet information and recommendations.
certain specifications and performance requirements.
Mixing different oils can interfere with the proper
functioning of these additives and degrade lubricant
performance.
DX,LUBMIX -19-18MAR96-1/1

Alternative and Synthetic Lubricants

Conditions in certain geographical areas may require
lubricant recommendations different from those printed in Synthetic lubricants may be used if they meet the
this manual. performance requirements as shown in this manual.

Some John Deere brand coolants and lubricants may not The temperature limits and service intervals shown in
be available in your location. this manual apply to both conventional and synthetic
lubricants.
Consult your John Deere dealer to obtain information and
recommendations. Re-refined base stock products may be used if the
finished lubricant meets the performance requirements.
DX,ALTER -19-11APR11-1/1

80-8 021412

PN=152
 Fuel, Lubricants, Hydraulic Oil and Coolant

Lubricant Storage
Your equipment can operate at top efficiency only when
clean lubricants are used. Make certain that all containers are properly marked to
identify their contents.
Use clean containers to handle all lubricants.
Properly dispose of all old containers and any residual
Store lubricants and containers in an area protected from lubricant they may contain.
dust, moisture, and other contamination. Store containers
on their side to avoid water and dirt accumulation.
DX,LUBST -19-11APR11-1/1

Oil Filters Use filters meeting John Deere performance

Filtration of oils is critical to proper operation and specifications.
lubrication.
Always change filters regularly as specified in this manual.
DX,FILT -19-18MAR96-1/1

Heavy Duty Diesel Engine Coolant

The engine cooling system is filled to provide year-round
protection against corrosion and cylinder liner pitting, and
• Is formulated with a quality nitrite-free additive package.
winter freeze protection to -37°C (-34°F). If protection at
• Provides cylinder liner cavitation protection according to
either the John Deere Cavitation Test Method or a fleet
lower temperatures is required, consult your John Deere study run at or above 60% load capacity
dealer for recommendations.
• Protects the cooling system metals (cast iron, aluminum
The following engine coolants are preferred: alloys, and copper alloys such as brass) from corrosion

• John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Premix The additive package must be part of one of the following
• John Deere COOL-GARD II PG Premix coolant mixtures:

Use John Deere COOL-GARD II PG Premix when a • ethylene glycol or propylene glycol base prediluted
non-toxic coolant formulation is required. (40—60%) heavy duty coolant
• ethylene glycol or propylene glycol base heavy
Additional Recommended Coolants duty coolant concentrate in a 40—60% mixture of
concentrate with quality water
The following engine coolant is also recommended:
Water Quality
• John Deere COOL-GARD II Concentrate in a 40–60%
mixture of concentrate with quality water. Water quality is important to the performance of the
cooling system. Distilled, deionized, or demineralized
John Deere COOL-GARD II Premix, COOL-GARD II PG
water is recommended for mixing with ethylene glycol and
Premix, and COOL-GARD II Concentrate coolants do not
propylene glycol base engine coolant concentrate.
require use of supplemental coolant additives.
IMPORTANT: Do not use cooling system sealing
Other Coolants additives or antifreeze that contains
John Deere COOL-GARD II and COOL-GARD II PG sealing additives.
coolants might not be available in the geographical area Do not mix ethylene glycol and propylene
where service is performed. glycol base coolants.
If these coolants are unavailable, use a coolant Do not use coolants that contain nitrites.
concentrate or prediluted coolant intended for use with
heavy duty diesel engines and with a minimum of the
following chemical and physical properties:

COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company

DX,COOL3 -19-14APR11-1/1

80-9 021412

PN=153
 Fuel, Lubricants, Hydraulic Oil and Coolant

John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Coolant Extender

Some coolant additives will gradually deplete during IMPORTANT: Do not add a supplemental coolant
engine operation. For John Deere COOL-GARD™ II additive when the cooling system is drained
Premix, COOL-GARD II PG Premix, and COOL-GARD II and refilled with any of the following:
Concentrate, replenish coolant additives between drain
intervals by adding John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant • John Deere COOL-GARD II
Extender. • John Deere COOL-GARD II PG
John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender should not The use of non-recommended supplemental coolant
be added unless indicated by coolant testing. additives may result in additive drop-out, gelation of the
John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender is a coolant, or corrosion of cooling system components.
chemically matched additive system for use with all Add the recommended concentration of John Deere
John Deere COOL-GARD II coolants. John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender. DO NOT add more
COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender is not intended for use than the recommended amount.
with nitrite-containing coolants.
COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
DX,COOL16 -19-20APR11-1/1

Operating in Warm Temperature Climates

John Deere engines are designed to operate using glycol the same level of corrosion inhibitor as John Deere
base engine coolants. COOL-GARD II Premix (50/50).
Always use a recommended glycol base engine coolant, IMPORTANT: Water may be used as coolant in
even when operating in geographical areas where freeze emergency situations only.
protection is not required.
Foaming, hot surface aluminum and iron
John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Premix is available in a corrosion, scaling, and cavitation will occur
concentration of 50% ethylene glycol. However, there when water is used as the coolant, even when
are situations in warm temperature climates where a coolant conditioners are added.
coolant with lower glycol concentration (approximately
20% ethylene glycol) has been approved. In these cases, Drain cooling system and refill with
the low glycol formulation has been modified to provide recommended glycol base engine coolant
as soon as possible.

COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company

DX,COOL6 -19-03NOV08-1/1

Drain Intervals for Diesel Engine Coolant

Drain and flush the cooling system and refill with fresh
coolant at the indicated interval, which varies with the If John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Premix, COOL-GARD II
coolant used. PG Premix, or COOL-GARD II Concentrate is used, but
the coolant is not tested OR additives are not replenished
John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Premix, COOL-GARD by adding John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender,
II PG Premix and COOL-GARD II Concentrate are the drain interval is four years or 4000 hours of operation.
maintenance free coolants for up to six years or 6000 This drain interval only applies to COOL-GARD II coolants
hours of operation, provided that the cooling system is that have been maintained within a 40—60% mixture of
topped off using only John Deere COOL-GARD II Premix concentrate with quality water.
or COOL-GARD II PG Premix.
If a coolant other than COOL-GARD II, or COOL-GARD
Test the coolant condition annually with Coolant Test II PG is used, reduce the drain interval to two years or
Strips designed for use with John Deere COOL-GARD 2000 hours of operation.
II coolants. If the test strip chart indicates that additive
is required, add John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant
Extender as directed.
COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
DX,COOL11 -19-14APR11-1/1

80-10 021412

PN=154
 Fuel, Lubricants, Hydraulic Oil and Coolant

Additional Information About Diesel Engine Coolants and John Deere LIQUID COOLANT
CONDITIONER

Engine coolants are a combination of three chemical

components: ethylene glycol or propylene glycol Avoid Automotive-type Coolants
antifreeze, inhibiting coolant additives, and quality water. Never use automotive-type coolants (such as those
Coolant Specifications meeting ASTM D3306). These coolants do not contain
the correct additives to protect heavy-duty diesel engines.
Some products, including John Deere COOL-GARD™ They often contain a high concentration of silicates and
Premix coolant, are fully formulated coolants that contain may damage the engine or cooling system. Do not treat
all three components in their correct concentrations. Do an automotive engine coolant with a supplemental coolant
not add an initial charge of supplemental coolant additives additive because the high concentration of additives can
or water to John Deere COOL-GARD Premix. result in additive fallout.
John Deere COOL-GARD Concentrate contains both Water Quality
ethylene glycol and inhibiting coolant additives. Mix
COOL-GARD Concentrate with quality water, but do not Water quality is important to the performance of the
add an initial charge of supplemental coolant additives. cooling system. Distilled, deionized, or demineralized
water is recommended for mixing with ethylene glycol
Replenish Coolant Additives and propylene glycol base engine coolant concentrate.
All water used in the cooling system should meet the
Some coolant additives will gradually deplete during following minimum specifications for quality:
engine operation. Periodic replenishment of inhibitors is
Chlorides <40 mg/L
required, even when John Deere COOL-GARD Premix,
COOL-GARD Concentrate, or COOL-GARD PG Premix is Sulfates <100 mg/L
used. Follow the recommendations in this manual for the Total dissolved solids <340 mg/L
use of supplemental coolant additives. Total hardness <170 mg/L
pH 5.5 to 9.0
Why use John Deere LIQUID COOLANT
CONDITIONER?
Freeze Protection
Operating without proper coolant additives will result in
increased corrosion, cylinder liner erosion and pitting, and The relative concentrations of glycol and water in the
other damage to the engine and cooling system. A simple engine coolant determine its freeze protection limit.
mixture of ethylene glycol or propylene glycol and water Ethylene Glycol Freeze Protection Limit
will not give adequate protection. 40% -24°C (-12°F)
John Deere LIQUID COOLANT CONDITIONER is an 50% -37°C (-34°F)
additive system designed to reduce corrosion, erosion, 60% -52°C (-62°F)
and pitting when used with nitrite-containing diesel engine Propylene Glycol Freeze Protection Limit
coolants such as John Deere COOL-GARD Premix, 40% -21°C (-6°F)
COOL-GARD Concentrate, and COOL-GARD PG Premix.
50% -33°C (-27°F)
Maintaining John Deere COOL-GARD coolants with
60% -49°C (-56°F)
John Deere LIQUID COOLANT CONDITIONER provides
optimum protection for up to 5 years or 5000 hours of
operation. DO NOT use a coolant-water mixture greater than 60%
ethylene glycol or 60% propylene glycol.
COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
DX,COOL7 -19-03NOV08-1/1

80-11 021412

PN=155
 Fuel, Lubricants, Hydraulic Oil and Coolant

Testing Diesel Engine Coolant

Maintaining adequate concentrations of glycol and
inhibiting additives in the coolant is critical to protect the Add only the recommended concentration of John Deere
engine and cooling system against freezing, corrosion, COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender. DO NOT add more
and cylinder liner erosion and pitting. than the recommended amount.

Test the coolant solution at intervals of 12 months or less When Using Nitrite-Containing Coolants
and whenever excessive coolant is lost through leaks or Compare the test strip results to the supplemental coolant
overheating. additive (SCA) chart to determine the amount of inhibiting
Coolant Test Strips additives in your coolant and whether more John Deere
Liquid Coolant Conditioner should be added.
Coolant test strips are available from your John Deere
dealer. These test strips provide a simple, effective Add only the recommended concentration of John Deere
method to check the freeze point and additive levels of Liquid Coolant Conditioner. DO NOT add more than the
your engine coolant. recommended amount.

When Using John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant Analysis

John Deere COOL-GARD II Premix™ , COOL-GARD For a more thorough evaluation of your coolant, perform a
II PG Premix and COOL-GARD II Concentrate are coolant analysis. The coolant analysis can provide critical
maintenance free coolants for up to six years or 6000 data such as freezing point, antifreeze level, pH, alkalinity,
hours of operation, provided that the cooling system is nitrite content (cavitation control additive), molybdate
topped off using only John Deere COOL-GARD II Premix content (rust inhibitor additive), silicate content, corrosion
or COOL-GARD II PG premix. Test the coolant condition metals, and visual assessment.
annually with coolant test strips designed for use with Contact your John Deere dealer for more information on
John Deere COOL-GARD II coolants. If the test strip coolant analysis.
chart indicates that additive is required, add John Deere
COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender as directed.
COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
DX,COOL9 -19-11APR11-1/1

80-12 021412

PN=156
 Fuel, Lubricants, Hydraulic Oil and Coolant

Oilscan™ and CoolScan™

Oilscan™ and CoolScan™ are John Deere sampling
programs to help you monitor machine performance and
identify potential problems before they cause serious
damage.

T6828AB —UN—15JUN89
Oil and coolant samples should be taken from each
system before its recommended change interval.
Check with your John Deere dealer for the availability of
Oilscan™ and CoolScan™ kits.

T6829AB —UN—26AUG11
Oilscan is a trademark of Deere & Company
CoolScan is a trademark of Deere & Company
DX,OILSCAN -19-13SEP11-1/1

80-13 021412

PN=157
 Lubrication and Periodic Service
Using High Pressure Washers
IMPORTANT: High-pressure washers are a very
effective means of cleaning the tractor. To avoid
damage to the tractor, do not go closer than
1 m (39 in.) and spray at an angle between
45 and 90° when cleaning sealing surfaces,

T6642EJ —UN—18OCT88
seals and decals. Maximum pressure must not
exceed 12000 kPa (120 bar; 1740 psi).
Do not, under any circumstances, spray or
wash components (e.g. the engine) with cold
water when hot. Do not use rotary nozzles
or water at temperatures over 50°C (122°F),
and do not aim at seals. Keep the water jet
moving at all times. Cooling units, the hitch jaw, high-pressure washer operator's manual and
bearings and electronic/electrical equipment manuals of attached equipment.
must not be cleaned with high-pressure
washers. Follow the instructions in the
OU12401,0001C6B -19-24JUN09-1/1

Service Intervals
CAUTION: Do not lubricate or adjust the
tractor while the engine is running unless
recommended to do so.

LX1030687 —UN—06MAY08
The intervals at which the various parts should be
checked, lubricated, serviced or adjusted are based on
the actual hours of operation as shown on the hour meter.
The meter operates whenever the engine is running and
shows the accumulated hours of engine operation.
Every 250 hours, an acoustic warning signal goes off as
the engine starts (for five consecutive engine starts). This
reminds the operator that service work is due.
IMPORTANT: After servicing, cleaning or repairing
Always check to make sure that the hour meter is
your tractor, reinstall any safety guards or
serviceable.
shields before operating the tractor again.
The lubrication and periodic service intervals are for
normal working conditions. These intervals should be
shortened when operating under adverse conditions.
OU12401,0000ECA -19-28SEP03-1/1

85-1 021412

PN=158
 Lubrication and Periodic Service

Safe Maintenance and Cleaning

CAUTION: To perform service work at locations

that are difficult to reach, it is essential to use
suitable platforms or safety ladders.

TS249 —UN—23AUG88
Particular care is required to perform service work and
cleaning jobs at locations that are difficult to reach, e.g.
adjusting roof-mounted lights, servicing the cooling
system, adjusting the right outside mirror on tractors
without a door on the right side and many other similar
tasks.

CAUTION: It is NOT permissible to stand on

tractor components to perform such tasks
unless the tractor components are intended
for this purpose. There is an acute risk of
falling, especially if the tractor components
are wet, dirty, or coated with ice.
OULXBER,0001A59 -19-21FEB11-1/1

General Instructions Regarding the Condition of the Tractor

Perform a thorough visual inspection of the tractor on a • Tires are in good condition.
regular basis or at every service interval at the latest. • All lines and hoses are in good condition.
Ensure the following: • Electrical wiring and ground connections are in good
condition.
• Safety features and shields are in place and have been • There are no flammable materials in high heat emission
installed properly. areas.
• All warning labels and decals are in place and are • Tractor is free from leakage.
legible.
OU12401,00018FB -19-16NOV07-1/1

Open the Hood

Pull the catch and lift the hood up.
NOTE: If the tractor is equipped with a hood protector
(front loader), the protector must be folded down

LX1026131 —UN—21MAY01
before the hood can be opened.

OULXE59,00109D4 -19-27NOV09-1/1

85-2 021412

PN=159
 Lubrication and Periodic Service

Access to Battery
The battery is located in front of the radiator. To gain
access, open the hood.

LX1036507 —UN—08JUN06
OULXE59,0010823 -19-14OCT05-1/1

Access to Fuses
Most of the fuses are located behind the operator's seat.
Other fuses are located in the engine compartment.

LX1042997 —UN—09JUL07
Fuses (for tractors with cab)

LX1043878 —UN—18SEP07
Fuses (for tractors without cab)
OU12401,000181D -19-25AUG07-1/1

85-3 021412

PN=160
 Lubrication and Periodic Service

Jack Up the Tractor - Lifting Points lifting force. See Specifications, Loads and Weights in
Section 145.
The illustrations show the recommended lifting points for
jacking up the tractor. Use a stable jack with sufficient

LX1049994 —UN—03AUG11
A—Raise Rear of Tractor, e.g. to C—Raise Right End of Axle, e.g. E—Raise Left End of Axle, e.g. to
Remove Rear Wheel to Remove Right Front Wheel Remove Left Front Wheel
B—Raise Rear of Tractor, e.g. to D—Raise Center of Axle (Use F— Raise Front End of Tractor
Remove Rear Wheel Wooden Wedges to Prevent under the Basic Weight
Axle from Tilting)
OULXBER,0001AB2 -19-04AUG11-1/4

LX1049995 —UN—03AUG11
LX1049889 —UN—11FEB11

With Hydraulic Pick-Up Hitch Without Hydraulic Pick-Up Hitch

Continued on next page OULXBER,0001AB2 -19-04AUG11-2/4

85-4 021412

PN=161
 Lubrication and Periodic Service

C—Raise Right End of Axle, E—Raise Left End of Axle, e.g.

e.g. to Remove Right Front to Remove Left Front Wheel
Wheel F— Raise Front End of Tractor
D—Raise Center of Axle (Use under the Basic Weight
Wooden Wedges to Prevent
Axle from Tilting)

LX1049996 —UN—03AUG11
OULXBER,0001AB2 -19-04AUG11-3/4

LX1049890 —UN—11FEB11
JT07211 —UN—14DEC06

JT02043 and JT02044 Support Stands Example

JT02043—Support Stand, 482 to JT02044—Support Stand, 863 to

736 mm (19 to 29 in.) 1117 mm (34 to 44 in.)

The special John Deere tools shown can be

CAUTION: Use approved lifting equipment only. used for this purpose. These support stands are
Jack up tractor on firm, level ground only. available from your John Deere dealer.

Before doing any further work on the tractor,

first secure it using suitable support stands.
OULXBER,0001AB2 -19-04AUG11-4/4

85-5 021412

PN=162
 Lubrication and Periodic Service

Important Instructions Regarding Alternator

NOTE: The alternator is equipped with over-
voltage protection.

If engine is to be run for a short time without battery (using

LX1036509 —UN—19OCT05
a slave battery for starting), do not run engine at a speed
above 1000 rpm. Furthermore, use additional current
(lights) while engine is running.
With the battery removed and when starting by means of a
slave battery, insulate the battery end of the disconnected
starter cable. This will avoid damage to the alternator and
regulator.
Slave battery cables must be connected only to the poles
provided for this purpose. Connect ground terminal of welding apparatus directly to
the part being welded.
With the engine running, do not short-circuit or ground the
alternator and regulator even momentarily. Before carrying out repairs on electrical system,
disconnect battery ground strap. This will avoid the
Connect battery and charger with the correct polarity. If danger of a short circuit.
they are improperly connected (”+” and ”-”), the rectifier
diodes will be destroyed immediately.
Before carrying out any electro-welding jobs on the tractor,
disconnect the two cables at the alternator and at
the battery.
OULXE59,0010825 -19-13MAY06-1/1

Note Regarding the Service Interval for

NOTE: It is essential to comply with Drain Intervals
Engine Coolant for Diesel Engine Coolant in Section 80, Fuel,
The interval may be shorter when a coolant other than Lubricants, Hydraulic Oil and Coolant. There
COOL-GARD™ II is used. The most important service you will find details of service intervals and
intervals are stated in the table. related circumstances.

Operating hours (after x years at the latest) Coolant meets John Deere specification COOL-GARD II
2000 (after 2 years) X —

— Valid if condition of COOL-GARD II is not

4000 (after 4 years)
checked once a year.

— Valid if condition of COOL-GARD II is

6000 (after 6 years)
checked once a year.

COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company

OULXBER,000194A -19-24NOV11-1/1

After the First 100 Hours

Drain engine crankcase and refill with fresh oil (see Service / Every 500 Hours).
Replace engine oil filter (see Service / Every 500 Hours).
Tighten screws on front loader bracket (see Service / Every 250 Hours).
Check air intake hoses (see Service / Every 500 Hours).
Replace transmission/hydraulic oil filter (see Service / Every 750 Hours).
Drain the axle housing and final drives, and refill with fresh oil (see Service / Every 1500 Hours).
Lubricate front PTO drive shaft (see Service / Every 250 Hours).
Retighten cab attaching screws.
Torques: front screws 280 Nm (205 lb-ft), rear screws 200 Nm (150 lb-ft)
OU12401,0001B75 -19-19FEB09-1/1

85-6 021412

PN=163
 Lubrication and Periodic Service

Service As Required
Clean air cleaner and cab air filters.
Clean radiator.
Check coolant level.
Check fuel filter, bleed fuel system.
Check tire pressures.
Lubrication points - lubricate, if tractor has been washed with high pressure water.
Check specific gravity of battery.
Replace fuses.
OU12401,0001D1A -19-26JUL11-1/1

Check/Replace Hydraulic Hoses Replace worn or damaged hoses immediately.

Check hydraulic hoses regularly – at least once a year – Replacement hoses are available from your John Deere
for leaks, kinks, cuts, tears, rubbing, bulges, corrosion, dealer.
exposed fabric and other signs of wear and damage.
OULXBER,0001A4B -19-10FEB11-1/1

Periodic Service
In the following tables, service work is only listed once.
Example: In addition to the 500 hour services, the 10 NOTE: When performing service work, always check
hour and 250 hour services have to be carried out. for any damage (e.g. on hydraulic lines, wiring
harnesses, etc.) and repair as necessary.
OU12401,00019D6 -19-22MAY08-1/1

Other Service Jobs

The tables below provide a list of service jobs that must
be carried out by your John Deere dealer. These service
jobs require technical experience and special equipment.
OULXE59,0010982 -19-12JAN09-1/1

85-7 021412

PN=164
 Lubrication and Periodic Service

Service (Daily / Every 10, Every 250, Every 500, Every 750 Hours)
Service Daily or every 250 hours 500 hours 750 hours
10 hours
Check engine oil level •
Check fuel filter •
Check lights •
Lubricate front axle and front-wheel drive shaft * •
Lubricate rear axle * •
Lubricate three-point hitch * •
Check oil level of transmission/hydraulic system ** •
Drain residue from fuel tank •
Check oil level of transmission/hydraulic system •
Check electrolyte level of battery •
Lubricate the front axle, u.j. shafts and drive shaft •
Check oil level in axle housing and final drives •
Check the brakes •
Lubricate three-point hitch •
Lubricate pivoting fenders •
Check neutral start circuit •
Tighten wheel retaining bolts/nuts •
Tighten the screws on the front loader bracket •
Check components of swinging drawbar for wear •
Change engine oil *** • •
Change engine oil filter element *** • •
Change fuel filter •
Lubricate rear axle •
Check air intake hoses •
Check ground connections (engine and cab) •
Check engine drive belt for wear •
Change cab air filters **** •
Change transmission/hydraulic oil filters •
* only necessary when operating in extremely wet and muddy conditions
** only necessary if the tractor is driving external hydraulic equipment
*** Engine oil must be changed at least once a year. Service intervals vary depending on the type of engine oil used and the sulfur content of the
fuel. See Diesel Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals in the Fuel, Lubricants, Hydraulic Oil and Coolant section.
**** Ultra-Gard activated carbon filters only. Replace the filters with new ones at least once every year.
OU12401,0001B9D -19-05MAY09-1/1

85-8 021412

PN=165
 Lubrication and Periodic Service

Service (Annually, Every 1000, Every 1500 Hours)

Service annually 1000 hours 1500 hours

Inspect seat belt. •

Drain engine crankcase and refill with fresh oil (see Service / Every 500 Hours). •
Use coolant test strip to test coolant (if COOL-GARD™ is used). •
Change the coolant (if the coolant used is not COOL-GARD).
Check engine drive belt for wear (see Service / Every 500 Hours). •
Tighten screws on front loader bracket (see Service / Every 250 Hours). •
Replace cab air filters. * •
Have viscous fan drive checked by your John Deere dealer. •
Drain the axle housing and final drives, and refill with fresh oil. •
Change oil in transmission/hydraulic system. •
Replace air cleaner element and cab air filters. •
* Ultra-Gard activated carbon filters only.

COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company

OU12401,0001B9E -19-08DEC11-1/1

Service (Every 2000, Every 6000 Hours)

Service
2000 hours 6000 hours

Have valve clearance checked by your John Deere dealer. •

Have glow plugs checked by your John Deere dealer. •
Change the coolant* (if COOL-GARD II is used and it is checked regularly every year). •
* If John Deere COOL-GARD II is not used, the coolant change interval is reduced to 2 years or 2000 hours of operation.
OULXE59,00109D7 -19-09DEC11-1/1

85-9 021412

PN=166
 Service / Daily or Every 10 Hours
Checking the Engine Oil Level
Engine oil level should always be between the marks on
the dipstick. Do not start the engine if oil level is below
lower mark on dipstick.

LX1042915 —UN—10APR07
A—Dipstick B—Oil filler cap

LX1041430 —UN—17NOV06
OU12401,0001719 -19-02APR07-1/1

Checking the Fuel Filter

If water or sediment deposits have settled in filter, proceed
as follows:
1. Open bleed screw (A).

LX1042911 —UN—10APR07
2. Open drain plug (B) by 3/4 of a turn. Retighten the
plug as soon as water and sediment deposits have
drained out.
3. Open drain plug (C) by 3/4 of a turn. Retighten the
plug as soon as water and sediment deposits have
drained out.
4. Tighten bleed screw (A).
5. Turn key in main switch to the right to the first switch
position so that the fuel transfer pump is operating.
Keep the pump running for approx. 40 seconds.
LX1031622 —UN—23JAN06
If water was present in fuel filter, use a 1/2-inch
square-section key to loosen drain plug (D) under the
fuel tank by one turn. After draining off any water and
sediment deposits, retighten drain plug until hand-tight.

A—Bleed screw C—Drain plug

B—Drain plug D—Drain plug (fuel tank)

OU12401,000171A -19-09APR07-1/1

90-1 021412

PN=167
 Service / Daily or Every 10 Hours

Checking on Lights Comply with all legal regulations.

Check that the lights are operating correctly, especially
before driving on public roads.
LX,LICHT 002082 -19-01FEB92-1/1

Other Service Jobs • Front axle and front-wheel drive shaft

If the tractor is used to power external hydraulic equipment, • Rear axle
check the level of the transmission/hydraulic oil. • Three-point hitch
If the tractor is used in particularly wet and muddy terrain, These jobs are described in ”Service - Every 250 Hours”
apply extra lubrication as follows: and ”Service - Every 500 Hours”.
OU12401,0001321 -19-14OCT05-1/1

90-2 021412

PN=168
 Service / Every 250 Hours
Servicing the Fuel Tank
Use a 1/2-inch square-section key to slacken off the
drain screw by one turn. Drain water and contaminants.
Re-insert drain screw and tighten by hand.

LX1024725 —UN—06NOV00
OU12401,0000504 -19-03NOV00-1/1

Check Transmission/Hydraulic System Oil

Level
IMPORTANT: Check oil level when oil is cold. If
possible, check the oil level in the morning after
the tractor has been standing overnight.

LX1042999 —UN—10JUL07
1. Park tractor so that it is level.
2. Engage the park lock.
3. Lower draft links, front loader, front implements and
other implements that draw oil from the transmission.
4. Oil level should be between marks (A) on the sight
glass. If it is not, add more oil at filler neck (B).

A—Sight glass (l.h. side of B—Filler neck

transmission)

LX1037219 —UN—21OCT05
OU12401,0001821 -19-25AUG07-1/1

Prevent Battery Explosions

Keep sparks, lighted matches, and open flame away from
the top of battery. Battery gas can explode.
Never check battery charge by placing a metal object
across the posts. Use a volt-meter or hydrometer.
TS204 —UN—23AUG88

Do not charge a frozen battery; it may explode. Warm

battery to 16°C (60°F).

DX,SPARKS -19-03MAR93-1/1

95-1 021412

PN=169
 Service / Every 250 Hours

Checking Electrolyte Level of Battery

Remove filler caps (A). Level of electrolyte should be
above the mark. Fill with distilled water only.
Check that the vent holes in the battery caps are open at

LX1031626 —UN—08JUN06
all times. If terminal connectors are corroded, remove
corrosion with a stiff bristle brush and then coat the
terminals with an acid-free grease.

OULXE59,0010858 -19-16MAR06-1/1

Lubricating Front Axle and Wheels (Tractors

without Front-Wheel Drive)
IMPORTANT: Carry out this service after every ten
hours of operation when working under very
wet and muddy conditions.

LX000514 —UN—10AUG94
Lubricate front axle and front wheel grease fittings (these
differ depending on tractor equipment) using John Deere
multipurpose grease.
IMPORTANT: Thoroughly clean all grease fittings
prior to greasing. Replace damaged grease
fittings immediately.

LX000515 —UN—12AUG94

LX000516 —UN—12AUG94
OU12401,0000BAC -19-01JAN03-1/1

95-2 021412

PN=170
 Service / Every 250 Hours

Lubricate Front Axle and U.J. Shafts

(Tractors with Front-Wheel Drive)
IMPORTANT: Carry out this service after every ten
hours of operation when working under very
wet and muddy conditions.

LX1043000 —UN—11JUL07
Lubricate the grease fittings on final drives (two on each
final drive), axle center section and rear drive shaft using
John Deere multipurpose grease.
IMPORTANT: Thoroughly clean all grease fittings
prior to greasing. Replace damaged grease
fittings immediately.

LX1038389 —UN—08JUN06
LX1038390 —UN—08JUN06
Drive shaft (rear)

OU12401,000178C -19-06JUL07-1/1

Check Oil Level in MFWD Axle Housing

CAUTION: If the oil is hot, it may be under

pressure. Unscrew the level plug slowly.
LX1031712 —UN—09JUL03

Remove level plug (A). Oil must be level with plug bore.
Fill to proper level, if necessary. Tighten level plug to 90
Nm (66 lb.-ft.). Always use a transmission oil listed in the
Fuel, Lubricants, Hydraulic Oil and Coolant section.
NOTE: The position of the level plugs varies
depending on axle type.

OU12401,0000E46 -19-17MAY10-1/1

95-3 021412

PN=171
 Service / Every 250 Hours

Check Oil Level in MFWD Final Drives

CAUTION: If the oil is hot, it may be under
pressure. Unscrew the level plug slowly.

1. Turn the wheel until OIL LEVEL mark (A) is horizontal.

LX1041044 —UN—21JUN06
2. Remove level plug (B). Oil must be level with plug bore.
3. If necessary, top up with oil at this point. Tighten level
plug to 90 Nm (66 lb.-ft.). Always use a transmission
oil listed in the Fuel, Lubricants, Hydraulic Oil and
Coolant section.
NOTE: Change oil in axle housing and final drives after
the first 100 hours of operation. Then change
A—Mark B—Level Plug
after every 1500 hours of operation or once every
2 years, whichever occurs first.

OU12401,0001436 -19-17MAY10-1/1

Checking Brake Operation

Shut off the engine and check that the brakes are
operating properly:
1. One at a time, press down on the left and right brake
pedals. Do this several times to each pedal. Distinct

LX002525 —UN—09AUG94
resistance should be noticeable at each of the two
pedals. If no resistance can be felt at the pedals, bleed
the air from the brakes, or see your John Deere dealer.
2. Check to make sure the pedals do not settle to the
end of stroke within 10 seconds after being applied. If
leakage exceeds this rate or if one pedal settles faster
than the other, see your John Deere dealer.
3. Press both pedals down at the same time. Distinct Distinct pedal resistance and balance
resistance should occur at both pedals at roughly the between the left and right pedals are
same height. If the height at which resistance can be important for emergency braking with the
felt differs by more than 51 mm (2 in.), bleed the air two brakes coupled together.
from the brakes, or see your John Deere dealer.
IMPORTANT: Any noticeable drift downward from
the point of resistance indicates brake leakage.
See your John Deere dealer.
OU12401,0000992 -19-01NOV01-1/1

Lubricating the Three-Point Hitch

Lubricate grease fittings with several strokes of grease
gun. Use John Deere multi-purpose grease.
NOTE: The grease fittings on the second lift cylinder and
LX1036519 —UN—26APR06

second lift link are not visible in this illustration.

OULXE59,0010847 -19-18DEC05-1/1

95-4 021412

PN=172
 Service / Every 250 Hours

Lubricate the Pivoting Fenders

Lubricate grease fittings with several strokes of grease
gun. Use John Deere multipurpose grease.

LX1036601 —UN—16AUG05
OU12401,0001286 -19-09AUG05-1/1

Check the Neutral Start Circuit

Tractors with SyncroPlus transmission:
1. Depress the clutch pedal.

LX1026197 —UN—14FEB02
2. Move range shift lever (A) to neutral.
3. Move gear shift lever (B) to any gear.
4. Turn key in main switch as far as it will go to the right.
The starting motor must NOT turn over. If it does, see
your John Deere dealer immediately.
5. Repeat the test in all the other gears.
OU12401,000178D -19-06JUL07-1/4

Tractors with PowrReverser transmission:

1. Depress the clutch pedal.
2. Move range shift lever (A) to neutral.
3. Move reverser lever (B) to any travel direction (forward
LX1043002 —UN—26JUL07

LX1043001 —UN—10JUL07
or reverse).
4. Turn key in main switch as far as it will go to the right.
The starting motor must NOT turn over. If it does, see
your John Deere dealer immediately.
5. Repeat the test in the other direction of travel.

Continued on next page OU12401,000178D -19-06JUL07-2/4

95-5 021412

PN=173
 Service / Every 250 Hours

Tractors with PowrQuad transmission:

1. Depress the clutch pedal.
2. Move range shift lever (A) to neutral.
3. Move reverser lever (B) to "forward" position.

LX1043004 —UN—10JUL07

LX1043003 —UN—10JUL07
4. Turn key in main switch as far as it will go to the right.
The starting motor must NOT turn over. If it does, see
your John Deere dealer immediately.
5. Repeat the test in the "reverse" position.

OU12401,000178D -19-06JUL07-3/4

Tractors with PowrQuad Plus transmission:

1. Move range shift lever (A) to neutral.
2. Move the reverser lever (B) to "forward" or "reverse".
3. Start the engine and wait 6-7 seconds. The “N” display

LX1043002 —UN—26JUL07

LX1043005 —UN—10JUL07
must light up.
4. Depress the clutch and engage any range. Gradually
release the clutch pedal. The tractor must NOT start
to move. If it does, see your John Deere dealer
immediately.

OU12401,000178D -19-06JUL07-4/4

95-6 021412

PN=174
 Service / Every 250 Hours

Tighten Wheel Retaining Bolts/Nuts

Tighten rear wheel retaining bolts/nuts

A—500 Nm (370 lb-ft) C—230 Nm (170 lb-ft)

B—250 Nm (185 lb-ft)

LX1029238 —UN—05MAY03

LX001297 —UN—12AUG94
LX1048571 —UN—08DEC09
OU12401,0001D8D -19-08DEC09-1/2

Tighten front wheel retaining bolts/nuts

A—250 Nm (185 lb-ft) C—250 Nm (185 lb-ft)

B—300 Nm (220 lb-ft)

LX1029249 —UN—24APR03
LX000558 —UN—12AUG94

OU12401,0001D8D -19-08DEC09-2/2

95-7 021412

PN=175
 Service / Every 250 Hours

Tighten Screws on Front Loader Bracket

Tighten the screws on the front loader bracket to 550 Nm
(405 lb-ft).
See also “Front Loader Installation - Front Loader

LX1041435 —UN—20NOV06
Brackets” in Section 71.

OU12401,000157A -19-11AUG11-1/1

95-8 021412

PN=176
 Service / Every 250 Hours

Checking the Swinging Drawbar for Wear

CAUTION: Parts that have reached or exceeded

their wear limit must be replaced with new parts.

LX1041436 —UN—20NOV06
Pin diameter (a) must be at least 29.5 mm (1.16 in.).

OU12401,000157B -19-18NOV06-1/2

Bore diameter (b) at the top and bottom (measured in

direction of travel) must not exceed 35.0 mm (1.38 in.).

LX1041437 —UN—20NOV06
OU12401,000157B -19-18NOV06-2/2

95-9 021412

PN=177
 Service / Every 500 Hours
Changing Engine Oil
IMPORTANT: Change oil whenever a seasonal
change in temperature makes oil of a
different viscosity necessary.

LX1042921 —UN—10APR07
NOTE: Carry out first oil change after first 100
hours of operation.

Drain oil with engine shut off, but with engine oil still warm.
1. Unscrew drain plug (A).
2. While crankcase is draining, replace filter element.
3. Re-install drain plug and tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
Use a new seal ring.
4. Fill crankcase with fresh oil of proper viscosity at filler
neck (B). See section "Fuel, Lubricants, Hydraulic Oil

LX1042917 —UN—10APR07
and Coolant". Capacity is approx. 15.5 liters (4.1
U.S.gal.).
5. Check oil level. Oil should be up to the top mark on
the dipstick. Fill to proper level, if necessary.
6. Run engine for a short time and check for leaks at filter
base and drain plug.
7. Shut off engine.
8. Check oil level once again. It must be up to the top
mark on the dipstick.

A—Drain plug B—Oil filler cap

LX1041430 —UN—17NOV06
OU12401,000171C -19-09APR07-1/1

Changing Engine Oil Filter Element

Remove filter element (A) and clean mounting surface
(B). If necessary, replace the dust seal on the contact
surface with a new one. Make sure that the lugs on the
dust seal engage in the recesses in the contact surface
LX1036524 —UN—19OCT05

LX1029276 —UN—08JUL02

of the filter element.

Apply a thin film of oil to sealing rings (C) of new filter.
Install new filter and tighten by hand.
Start engine and check base of filter for leaks.
Shut off engine and check oil level.
NOTE: Carry out first oil filter change after first
100 hours of operation.

OU12401,000132C -19-16OCT05-1/1

100-1 021412

PN=178
 Service / Every 500 Hours

Changing the Fuel Filters

Always change the two filters at the same time.
1. Disconnect cable (A) from the water sensor.

LX1042918 —UN—10APR07
2. Unfasten filter retaining ring (B) and remove filter (C).
Seal old filter with cover of the new one.
3. Remove water trap and install it on new filter.
4. Attach new filter. The marks on the filter must be
aligned with those on the housing.
5. Tighten retaining ring (B) until it clicks into place.
6. Reconnect cable (A).
7. Turn key in main switch to the right to the first switch
position so that the fuel transfer pump is operating.
Keep the pump running for approx. 40 seconds.

LX1042919 —UN—10APR07
A—Cable C—Filter
B—Retaining ring

OU12401,000171D -19-02APR07-1/1

Lubricating Rear Axle Bearings

IMPORTANT: Carry out this service after every ten
hours of operation when working under very
wet and muddy conditions.

LX000520 —UN—03JAN95
Lubricate both bearings with six to eight strokes of John
Deere multipurpose grease.

LX,OACH 000413 -19-01MAY92-1/1

Air Intake Hoses

The hoses vary depending on engine type.
Check hoses and tighten clamps.
Leaking or damaged hoses are the cause of dirt entering
LX1049781 —UN—28JUL10

the engine.

OU12401,000092B -19-28JUL10-1/1

100-2 021412

PN=179
 Service / Every 500 Hours

Checking the Engine Ground Connection

Check the ground cable for signs of wear or damage.
Check that the attaching screws are secure.
Replace the ground cable if it is damaged.

LX1031627 —UN—08JUN06
OULXE59,001085B -19-18MAR06-1/1

Check the Cab Ground Connection

Check the ground cable for signs of wear or damage.
Check that the attaching screws are tight.
Replace the ground cable if it is damaged.

LX1041475 —UN—19DEC06
OU12401,00015D4 -19-17DEC06-1/1

Check Engine Drive Belt for Wear

If the drive belt shows any signs of wear, see your John
Deere dealer.

LX1041031 —UN—08JUN06

OU12401,000143A -19-06JUN06-1/1

100-3 021412

PN=180
 Service / Every 750 Hours
Replace Transmission/Hydraulic Oil Filter
NOTE: Replace transmission/hydraulic system filter
elements after the first 100 hours of operation.
Then replace after the first 750 hours of operation,
and regularly every 750 hours thereafter.

LX000287 —UN—15AUG94
1. Unscrew filter elements.
2. Coat sealing rings of new filter elements with grease
and screw in filter elements.
Use original John Deere filter elements only!
IMPORTANT: Always replace both filters at the same
time. Never change one only.

OU12401,000178F -19-06JUL07-1/1

105-1 021412

PN=181
 Service / Once a Year
Checking Seat Belt damage, such as cuts, fraying, extreme or unusual wear,
discoloration, or abrasion. Replace only with replacement
Replace entire seat belt if mounting hardware, buckle, parts approved for your machine. See your John Deere
belt or retractor show signs of damage. dealer.
Inspect seat belt and mounting hardware at least
once a year. Look for signs of loose hardware or belt
LX,OMWART020394 -19-01JUL99-1/1

Check Engine Coolant II Premix coolant. Test the coolant condition annually
with coolant test strips designed for use with John Deere
John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Premix and COOL-GARD COOL-GARD II coolants. If the test strip chart indicates
II Concentrate are maintenance-free coolants for up to 6 that additive is required, add John Deere COOL-GARD
years or 6000 hours of operation, provided that the cooling II EXTENDER as directed.
system is topped off using only John Deere COOL-GARD
COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
OULXBER,000194B -19-03AUG10-1/1

110-1 021412

PN=182
 Service / Every 1500 Hours or 2 Years
Changing Oil in Front-Wheel Drive Axle and Final Drives
Change oil in axle housing and final drives after the first Always drain oil while it is still warm, i.e. immediately after
100 hours of operation. Then change after every 1500 a prolonged period of operation.
hours of operation or once every 2 years, whichever
occurs first. Always use a transmission oil listed in the
”Fuel, Lubricants, Hydraulic Oil and Coolant” section.
OU12401,000140B -19-13MAY06-1/1

Change Oil In Front-Wheel Drive Axle

Housing

CAUTION: If the oil is hot, it may be under

pressure. Remove drain screw slowly.

LX1031715 —UN—09JUL03
1. Remove drain screw (A) and drain oil into a suitable
container.
2. Re-install drain screw and tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb.-ft.).
3. Remove oil level/filler plug (B). Fill with fresh oil. The
oil level must be up to the filler hole. Re-install plug.
NOTE: Location of screws varies depending on axle type.
Recommended oil Hy-Gard™ transmission/hydraulic
oil. See also Section 80 (Fuel,
Lubricants, Hydraulic Oil and
Coolant).

LX1031716 —UN—09JUL03
Capacity 6.5 L (1.7 U.S.gal.)

Hy-Gard is a trademark of Deere & Company

OU12401,0000E4A -19-17MAY10-1/1

115-1 021412

PN=183
 Service / Every 1500 Hours or 2 Years

Change Oil in Front-Wheel Drive Final Drives

CAUTION: If the oil is hot, it may be under

pressure. Remove drain screw slowly.

LX1041032 —UN—08JUN06
1. Turn wheel until drain screw (A) is at the bottom.
Remove drain screw and drain oil into a suitable
container.
2. Turn the wheel through 90° so that the line marked
OIL LEVEL is horizontal (see Service / Every 250
Hours), and fill with fresh oil at drain screw bore. Oil
must be level with screw bore.
3. Re-install drain screw and tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb.-ft.).
Recommended oil Hy-Gard™ transmission/hydraulic
oil. See also Section 80 (Fuel,
Lubricants, Hydraulic Oil and
Coolant).
Capacity approx. 0.95 L (0.25 U.S.gal.)
To fill, follow the procedure
described above.

Hy-Gard is a trademark of Deere & Company

OULXBER,0001988 -19-23SEP10-1/1

Change Transmission/Hydraulic Oil

1. Start engine and operate several hydraulic functions
to heat up oil.
2. Park tractor so that it is level. Lower draft links and
front-mounted implements.

LX009834 —UN—03JAN95
3. Shut off engine and remove the key.
4. Engage the park lock.
5. Remove drain screws (A).
6. Replace transmission/hydraulic oil filter elements (B).
7. Remove plug (C), pull out intake screen and wash
in fuel. Clean the area where the intake screen is A—Drain screws C—Plug
installed. Re-install the intake screen. B—Transmission/hydraulic oil
filters
8. Before refilling with fresh oil, replace seals and tighten
drain screws to 50 Nm (35 lb-ft).
9. Add transmission/hydraulic oil to the transmission Wait for between 10 and 15 minutes before checking
case. the oil level. It should be between the marks on the
sight-glass. If not, correct oil level.
Run engine briefly and operate hydraulic functions. Shut
off the engine.
OU12401,0001823 -19-26AUG07-1/1

115-2 021412

PN=184
 Service / Every 6000 Hours
Note Regarding the Service Interval for
NOTE: It is essential to comply with Drain Intervals
Engine Coolant for Diesel Engine Coolant in Section 80, Fuel,
The interval may be shorter when a coolant other than Lubricants, Hydraulic Oil and Coolant. There
COOL-GARD™ II is used. The most important service you will find details of service intervals and
intervals are stated in the table. related circumstances.

Operating hours (after x years at the latest) Coolant meets John Deere specification COOL-GARD II
2000 (after 2 years) X —

— Valid if condition of COOL-GARD II is not

4000 (after 4 years)
checked once a year.

— Valid if condition of COOL-GARD II is

6000 (after 6 years)
checked once a year.

COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company

OULXBER,000194A -19-24NOV11-1/1

120-1 021412

PN=185
 Service / Every 6000 Hours

Change the Coolant

CAUTION: Do not open cap (A) of expansion

tank before coolant temperature is below boiling
point. First loosen the cap to relieve pressure,

LX1036534 —UN—20OCT05
then remove cap completely.

LX1036579 —UN—10JUN05
NOTE: If COOL-GARD is not used, the drain interval is
reduced to 2 years or 2000 hours of operation.

1. On tractors with cab, turn the heater control as far as it

will go to the right.
2. First loosen cap (A) and then take it off.
3. Turn connect/disconnect control (B) anti-clockwise as
far as it will go.
4. Place a container under the drains to trap the coolant
as it emerges. Open drain plug (C).
As soon as system is empty, close drain plug (C) and fill

LX1036535 —UN—20OCT05

LX1038337 —UN—27APR06
the system with clean water.
IMPORTANT: Never pour cold water or coolant into
the hot engine. Always use warm water or
wait until engine has cooled down.

CAUTION: Before starting the engine,

always close the hood.
A—Filler cap C—Drain plug (rear of radiator)
Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature. B—Connect/disconnect D—Lines
Shut off engine and drain cooling system. control (front of radiator)
Close drain plug again and fill the system with clean water.
Again run engine until it has reached operating
temperature. Shut off engine and drain system again. Start the engine and bring it up to operating temperature.

Close the drain plug and disconnect line (D). Fill the Shut down the engine and add coolant up to the max.
system with the prescribed coolant (see Fuel, Lubricants, mark on both tanks.
Hydraulic Oil and Coolant section) until coolant emerges Turn connect/disconnect control (B) clockwise as far as
from line (D). Retighten line (D). it will go.
Add coolant up to the max. mark on both tanks. Re-install and close the filler cap (A).
Start the engine and run it for 5 minutes. For efficient cooling, the radiator screen must be kept
Shut down the engine and add coolant up to the max. clean. Remove any dust or oil and carefully straighten
mark on both tanks. any bent fins.
OU12401,0001C84 -19-16OCT09-1/1

120-2 021412

PN=186
 Service / As Required
Engine Air Cleaner
If the air cleaner indicator lamp glows during operation,
remove and clean the primary filter element.
The service interval may be extended briefly, e.g. until the

LX1036537 —UN—20OCT05
next suitable opportunity. Provided the cleaner is serviced
properly, this will not adversely affect its performance.
The primary element can be cleaned up to five times.
Thereafter, or at the latest after 1500 hours of operation
(or 2 years), it must be replaced.
Open the hood, pull lug (A) forward and swing catch (B)
down. Fold cover (C) up. Pull the primary filter element
out of the cleaner housing.
IMPORTANT: Never run the engine without the
primary filter element!

LX1036538 —UN—20OCT05
A—Lug C—Cover
B—Catch

OU12401,00017C9 -19-21JUL07-1/1

Cleaning the Primary Filter Element

When the element must be serviced in the field, tap it on
the palm of your hand as a temporary measure.
IMPORTANT: The guide ring must not be

LX1026150 —UN—21MAY01
damaged or deformed.

When you return to your service area, clean the filter

element thoroughly, or replace it with a new one.

OU12401,0000933 -19-01MAY01-1/1

Cleaning a Dusty Element

If tapping element does not remove dust, blow out dust
with compressed air (not exceeding 600 kPa; 6 bar; 90
psi) by inserting nozzle inside the element and blowing
from the inside of the filter to the outside.
LX1026151 —UN—21MAY01

Replace element if air cleaner indicator light continues

glowing after the element has been cleaned.

OU12401,00102DE -19-01SEP01-1/1

125-1 021412

PN=187
 Service / As Required

Secondary (Safety) Element

This filter must be changed if it becomes damaged.
Change it at every fifth change of the air cleaner primary
element, and at the latest after 1500 hours of operation.

LX1036539 —UN—20OCT05
IMPORTANT: Always replace secondary (safety) filter
element, do not attempt to clean it.

OU12401,0001339 -19-17OCT05-1/1

Installation
With the rubber seal first (arrows on decal pointing into
the filter housing), slide a serviced or new primary filter
element as far as it will go into the filter housing. Fold
down the cover and let the catch click into place.

LX1036540 —UN—20OCT05
IMPORTANT: Never close the hood or start the engine
unless the filter is locked securely.

OU12401,000133A -19-17OCT05-1/1

Clean Cab Air Filters

NOTE: On tractors equipped with Ultra-Gard activated
carbon filters, the filters cannot be cleaned. These
filters must be replaced with new ones every 500
hours or once a year at the latest.

LX1026154 —UN—21MAY01
Every time the primary filter is serviced, also remove the
two cab air filters and the recirculated air filters, and clean
them with compressed air directed from the clean side.
Replace cab air filters together with engine primary air
filter element.
LX1043006 —UN—10JUL07

OU12401,0001791 -19-07JUL07-1/1

125-2 021412

PN=188
 Service / As Required

Clean Radiator and Condenser (if equipped)

For efficient cooling, the radiator screen must be kept
clean.
Pull the screen (if equipped) out to the side. Remove any

LX1037231 —UN—02NOV05
dirt from radiator and radiator screen.
Replace radiator screen.
NOTE: If the tractor is equipped with an air-conditioning
system, pull the condenser of the air-conditioning
system out to the side before cleaning the
radiator (see description below).

Continued on next page OU12401,000133C -19-17OCT05-1/2

125-3 021412

PN=189
 Service / As Required

Tractors with Air-Conditioning

For efficient cooling, the exterior of the condenser must
be kept clean.
Pull the screen (if equipped) out to the side. Remove any

LX1037232 —UN—02NOV05
contamination.
Disconnect spring (A) on both tractor sides and pull the
condenser out to the side. Remove any contamination.
When re-installing condenser, make sure that it engages
properly in the lower and upper guide rails (B and C
respectively). Also make sure that the condenser is
centered in relation to the radiator. Re-connect springs
(A) on both sides.
Replace condenser and radiator screens.

A—Spring C—Upper guide rail

LX1037233 —UN—02NOV05
B—Lower guide rail

LX1037532 —UN—02NOV05
LX1037533 —UN—02NOV05

LX1037534 —UN—02NOV05

OU12401,000133C -19-17OCT05-2/2

125-4 021412

PN=190
 Service / As Required

Check Coolant Level

If coolant temperature is too high, rectify the cause (dirty
radiator, clogged screen, coolant level too low).
Coolant level should be close to the max. mark (A). It

LX1044437 —UN—11DEC07
must under no circumstances fall below the min. mark (B).

A—Max. mark B—Min. mark

OU12401,0001D1F -19-15OCT09-1/1

Checking the Fuel Filter

If water or sediment deposits have settled in filter, proceed
as follows:
1. Open bleed screw (A).

LX1042911 —UN—10APR07
2. Open drain plug (B) by 3/4 of a turn. Retighten the
plug as soon as water and sediment deposits have
drained out.
3. Open drain plug (C) by 3/4 of a turn. Retighten the
plug as soon as water and sediment deposits have
drained out.
4. Tighten bleed screw (A).
5. Turn key in main switch to the right to the first switch
position so that the fuel transfer pump is operating.
Keep the pump running for approx. 40 seconds.

LX1031622 —UN—23JAN06
If water was present in fuel filter, use a 1/2-inch
square-section key to loosen drain plug (D) under the
fuel tank by one turn. After draining off any water and
sediment deposits, retighten drain plug until hand-tight.

A—Bleed screw C—Drain plug

B—Drain plug D—Drain plug (fuel tank)

OU12401,000171A -19-09APR07-1/1

Bleeding Air from the Fuel System

CAUTION: High-pressure fluid remaining in fuel

lines can cause serious injury. Do not disconnect
or attempt to repair fuel lines, sensors or any other
LX1042920 —UN—10APR07

components between injection pump and nozzles.

The fuel system must be bled whenever the fuel tank has
been run dry or the fuel filters have been replaced.
Turn key in main switch to the right to the first switch
position so that the fuel transfer pump is operating. Keep
the pump running for approx. 40 seconds.
OU12401,0001720 -19-02APR07-1/1

125-5 021412

PN=191
 Service / As Required

Lubricate All Lubricating Points

If the tractor has been washed with high-pressure
water, lubricate all lubricating points with John Deere
multi-purpose grease.
OU12401,000133E -19-17OCT05-1/1

Operator's Seat
Lubricate the slide rails with John Deere multi-purpose
grease.
OU12401,000133F -19-17OCT05-1/1

Prevent Battery Explosions

Keep sparks, lighted matches, and open flame away from
the top of battery. Battery gas can explode.
Never check battery charge by placing a metal object
across the posts. Use a volt-meter or hydrometer.

TS204 —UN—23AUG88
Do not charge a frozen battery; it may explode. Warm
battery to 16°C (60°F).

DX,SPARKS -19-03MAR93-1/1

Battery - Checking Specific Gravity

Use an hydrometer to check the specific gravity of the
electrolyte in each battery cell.
A fully charged battery should have a specific gravity

LX1036507 —UN—08JUN06
reading of 1.28. Recharge battery if reading drops below
1.20.
NOTE: In tropical regions, the battery is fully charged
when the reading is 1.23.

OULXE59,0010860 -19-18MAR06-1/1

Starter Motor
If the starter motor fails to operate after the starter switch are broken or worn through and that none of the cable
has been operated, the complete starter system must be connections are loose or corroded.
thoroughly checked. Check specific gravity of battery with
an hydrometer and make sure that none of the cables If the above checks fail to improve the operation of the
starter motor, see your John Deere dealer.
OU12401,000093E -19-01MAY01-1/1

125-6 021412

PN=192
 Service / As Required

Fuses and Relays in the Engine Compartment

IMPORTANT: To prevent unnecessary damage to the
electrical system, never use a fuse with a rating
higher than the one already installed.

LX1043760 —UN—20JUL07
NOTE: Depending on how the tractor is equipped, it may
not have all the fuses and relays shown below.

The fuse and relay box is located at the upper right-hand

side of the engine compartment.
Open the hood.
Take cover (A) off the fuse and relay box.
OU12401,00017B0 -19-21JUL07-1/1

Fuses and Relays (Engine Compartment)

A—Fuses F01PLB D—Relay K03PLB
B—Fuses F02PLB E—Relay K01PLB
C—Relay K02PLB F— Spare fuses

LX1044986 —UN—19MAY08
OU12401,00019CF -19-08MAY08-1/1

125-7 021412

PN=193
 Service / As Required

Fuses F01PLB (Engine Compartment) 01_PLB

1
Number Ca-
pacity
(amps) Consumer 2

F01PLB- - Not used

70A
/01 3
F01PLB- 70 A Heating element of electrical starting aid
/02 70A
F01PLB- 70 A Main fuse
/03
F01PLB- 70 A Main fuse
/04
F01PLB- - Not used
/05 4

LX1043762 —UN—19JUL07
F01PLB- - Not used 70A
/06 5

6
LX1043762

OU12401,00017B2 -19-21JUL07-1/1

Fuses F02PLB (Engine Compartment)

1 6
Number Capacity

6
1
(amps) Consumer 15A 10A

2 7
F02PLB- 15 A Heating element of fuel preheater CONTR
/01 BAT
10A 20A

F02PLB- 10 A Fuel Pump

/02
F02PLB- - Not used
/03
F02PLB- - Not used
/04

10
5

F02PLB- - Not used

/05

K02_01
F02PLB- 10 A Monitoring of electrical starting aid
/06
F02PLB- 20 A ECU control unit

LX1043763 —UN—19JUL07
/07
F02PLB- - Not used
/08
F02PLB- - Not used
70A

/09
F02PLB- - Not used LX1043763
/10 02_PLB

OU12401,00017B3 -19-21JUL07-1/1

125-8 021412

PN=194
 Service / As Required

Relays K01PLB to K03PLB (Engine Compartment)

01_PLB 6 10 K01_PLB
1

10A
K02_01

20A
CONTR
BAT

02_PLB
2

7
70A

15A

10A
3

70A
70A

2
1 5

K03_02 70/100A

03_PLB

LX1043775 —UN—19JUL07
70A 2 1
5

6
20/40A

LX1043775

Number Capacity
(amps) Designation
K01PLB 70/100 Starting motor relay
amps
K02PLB- 70 A Relay for electrical starting aid
/01
K03PLB- - Not used
/01
K03PLB- 20/40 Relay for fuel pump and fuel preheater
/02 amps

OU12401,00017B4 -19-21JUL07-1/1

125-9 021412

PN=195
 Service / As Required

Fuses and Relays (Tractors without Cab)

IMPORTANT: To prevent unnecessary damage to the
electrical system, never use a fuse with a rating
higher than the one already installed.

LX1043770 —UN—19JUL07
NOTE: Depending on how the tractor is equipped, it may
not have all the fuses and relays shown below.

The fuse and relay box is located on the left behind the
operator's seat in the rear wall of the open operator's
station.
Take cover (A) off the fuse and relay box.
OU12401,00017B5 -19-21JUL07-1/1

Fuses and Relays (without Cab)

A—Relays K01 E—Fuses F04
B—Fuses F02 F— Relays K04
C—Fuses F03 G—Spare fuses
D—Relays/diodes K03 H—Tool for changing fuses

LX1044987 —UN—20MAY08
OU12401,00019D0 -19-08MAY08-1/1

Fuses F02 (without Cab)

1 11
FUSE CHECK
Number Capacity ELX
(amps) Consumer 30A
2 12
F02/01 30 A Power supply for electronics
F02/02 15 A Main (key) switch 15A
3 13
F02/03 10 A Instrument unit BAT
10A
F02/04 10 A Instrument unit 4 14
ELX
F02/05 10 A BCU control unit
10A
F02/06 10 A BCU control unit (rear PTO, front PTO, 5
BCU
15
BCU
LH

front-wheel drive, differential lock) ELX BAT

10A 15A
F02/07 15 A Brake switch, brake light 6 16 RH

F02/08 10 A CAN BUS 10A 15A

7 17
F02/09 10 A ECU control unit BRAKE
LIGHT
LX1043772 —UN—19JUL07

F02/10 10 A ECU control unit 15A

8 18
F02/11 - Fuse tester CAN
IGN
F02/12 - Not used 10A 10A
9 19
- CONTR
F02/13 Not used ELX
LOADER
10A 10A
F02/14 - Not used 10 20
LX1043772 CONTR
F02/15 15 A Left turn signal, BCU control unit IGN
10A 10A
F02/16 15 A Right turn signal, hazard warning lights
F02/17 - Not used
F02/18 10 A Horn
F02/19 10 A Plug for front loader, back-up alarm
F02/20 10 A Operator's seat

OU12401,00017B7 -19-21JUL07-1/1

125-10 021412

PN=196
 Service / As Required

Fuses F03 (without Cab)

A D
Number Capacity FRONT FRONT
FENDER
(amps) Consumer 15A 15A
B E
F03/A 15 A Front worklights, front corner worklights FRONT/ FRONT
REAR LH
10A 10A
F03/B 10 A Left rear worklight, relay for worklights
C F
CODING FRONT
F03/C 10 A Right rear worklight RH
10A 10A
F03/D 15 A High-beam headlights
F03/E 10 A Left low-beam headlight A C

F03/F 10 A Right low-beam headlight

10/20A 10/20A

LX1043773 —UN—24AUG07
B D

ELX
1A

LX1043773 3A 10/20A

OU12401,00017B8 -19-21JUL07-1/1

Fuses F04 (without Cab)

1 6
Number Capacity ECE SAE
LH LH
(amps) Consumer 10A 10A
2 7
F04/01 10 A Left tail light (ECE), right clearance light (ECE), ECE SAE
RH RH
license plate light (ECE) 10A 10A
3 8
F04/02 10 A Right tail light (ECE), left clearance light (ECE) CODING CODING
ECE SAE
F04/03 10 A Light selection (ECE) 10A 10A
4 9
F04/04 20 A Light Switch MAIN
20A
F04/05 30 A 3-terminal socket, power outlet strip, 7-terminal 5 POWER 10 POWER ECE
socket (SAE) OUTLET OUTLET 10A
SAE
BAT 30A ELX
30A
30 A 3-terminal socket, socket strip (ECE)
F04/06 10 A Left tail light (SAE)
F04/07 10 A Right tail light (SAE)
F04/08 10 A Light selection (SAE)

LX1043774 —UN—19JUL07
F04/09 - Not used POWER
F04/10 30 A 3-terminal socket, power outlet strip, 7-terminal OUTLET
socket (SAE)
10 A 3-terminal socket, socket strip (ECE) 70A

LX1043774

OU12401,00017B9 -19-21JUL07-1/1

125-11 021412

PN=197
 Service / As Required

Relays K01 (without Cab)

Number Capacity
(amps) Designation 1

K01/1 20/40 Relay for power supply to electronics

amps
K01/2 - Acoustic alarm ELX

20/40A

LX1043781 —UN—19JUL07
ALARM

LX1043781

OU12401,00017BA -19-21JUL07-1/1

Relays/Diodes K03 (without Cab)

A D
Number Capacity FRONT FRONT
FENDER
(amps) Designation 15A 15A
B E
K03/A 10/20 Relay for front worklights, front corner FRONT/ FRONT
REAR LH
amps worklights 10A 10A
C F
K03/B 1 A Diode for power supply to electronics CODING FRONT
RH
K03/B 3 A Diode for lights 10A 10A

K03/C 10/20 Relay for full-beam headlights A C

amps
K03/D 10/20 Relay for low-beam headlights
amps

10/20A 10/20A

LX1043773 —UN—24AUG07
B D

ELX
1A

LX1043773 3A 10/20A

OU12401,00017BB -19-21JUL07-1/1

125-12 021412

PN=198
 Service / As Required

Relays K04 (without Cab)

1 6
Number Capacity ECE SAE
LH LH
(amps) Designation 10A 10A
2 7
K04/1 70 A Relay for 3-terminal socket, power outlet strip, ECE SAE
RH RH
7-terminal socket (SAE) 10A 10A
Relay for 3-terminal socket, power outlet strip 3 8
CODING CODING
(ECE) ECE SAE
10A 10A
4 9
MAIN
20A
5 POWER 10 POWER ECE
OUTLET OUTLET 10A
SAE
BAT 30A ELX
30A

LX1043774 —UN—19JUL07
POWER
OUTLET
70A

LX1043774

OU12401,00017BC -19-21JUL07-1/1

125-13 021412

PN=199
 Service / As Required

Fuses and Relays (Tractors with Cab)

IMPORTANT: To prevent unnecessary damage to the
electrical system, never use a fuse with a rating
higher than the one already installed.

LX1026549 —UN—30JUL01
NOTE: Depending on how the tractor is equipped, it may
not have all the fuses and relays shown below.

The fuse and relay box is located behind the operator's

seat just below the rear window.
Press down latches (A) and lift off the trim panel.

OU12401,00017BD -19-21JUL07-1/1

Fuses and Relays (with Cab)

A—Relays K01 G—Fuses F07
B—Relays K02 H—Relays K08
C—Relays/diodes K03 J— Relays K09
D—Fuses F04 K—Relays K10

LX1044988 —UN—20MAY08
E—Fuses F05 L— Spare fuses
F— Fuses F06 M—Tool for changing fuses

OU12401,00019D1 -19-08MAY08-1/1

Fuses F04 (with Cab) F04

1 13

Number Capacity 15A

(amps) Consumer 2

F04/01 15 A Main (key) switch

ACC1
30A
3
F04/02 30 A Power supply to accessories ACC2 14
30A
F04/03 30 A Power supply to accessories 4

F04/04 30 A Power supply for electronics ELX

30A
5
F04/05 10 A ECU control unit CONTR
IGN
10A
F04/06 10 A ECU control unit 6
CONTR
F04/07 10 A Plug for accessories ELX
10A
7
F04/08 10 A EPC control unit ACCESSORY
ELX 10A
PRC control unit
8
F04/09 15 A EPC control unit EPQT 15
ELX 10A
PRC control unit ELX
9
LX1047561 —UN—30JAN09

- EPQT
F04/10 Not used BAT 15A R

F04/11 30 A 3-terminal socket, power outlet strip, 7-terminal 10

G-STAR 10A
ISO
socket (SAE) BAT
10A 16
11 POWER
30 A 3-terminal socket, power outlet strip (ECE) OUTLET BAT
BAT 30A
F04/12 30 A 3-terminal socket, power outlet strip, 7-terminal 12 POWER ECE R

socket (SAE) LX1047561 OUTLET

10A
SAE
ELX 30A 10A
10 A 3-terminal socket, power outlet strip (ECE)
F04/13 - Not used
F04/14 - Not used
F04/15 10 A TSC control unit
F04/16 10 A TSC control unit

OU12401,0001B14 -19-30JAN09-1/1

125-14 021412

PN=200
 Service / As Required

Fuses F05 (with Cab) F05

1 13
CAN
Number Capacity IGN
10A
FUSE
CHECK
(amps) Consumer 2
BCU
F05/01 10 A CAN BUS 15A
3 LH
F05/02 15 A Brake switch, brake light BCU
14
BAT
15A
F05/03 15 A Left turn signal, BCU control unit 4 RH

F05/04 15 A Right turn signal, hazard warning lights 15A

5
F05/05 10 A BCU control unit BCU
ELX 10A
F05/06 10 A BCU control unit (rear PTO, front PTO, 6
front-wheel drive, differential lock)
10A
F05/07 - Not used 7

F05/08 10 A Instrument unit

8
15
F05/09 10 A Instrument unit ELX
10A

LX1044179 —UN—08NOV07
F05/10 15 A Light switch 9 RADIO
BAT
F05/11 - Not used 10A
10
F05/12 - Not used MAIN 10A
15A 16
F05/13 - Fuse tester 11
TECU
F05/14 - Not used BAT 10A
12
F05/15 10 A Console light, instrument unit light, radio light LX1044179 TECU
ELX 10A
F05/16 - Not used

OU12401,0001901 -19-05DEC07-1/1

Fuses F06 (with Cab) F06

1 13

Number Capacity 20A

(amps) Consumer 2
BELTLINE
F06/01 20 A Fan motor 20A CODING
3 30A
F06/02 20 A Fan motor 14
10A
F06/03 10 A Fan, air-conditioning system 4

F06/04 10 A Windshield wiper 10A

5
F06/05 10 A Rear window wiper CODING
15A
10A
F06/06 10 A Plug for front loader, back-up alarm 6
LOADER
F06/07 10 A Beacon light 10A
7
F06/08 10 A Dome light
10A
F06/09 10 A Radio 8
15
F06/10 10 A Horn 10A

LX1043768 —UN—24JUL07
9
F06/11 10 A Cigarette lighter RADIO
ACC
10A
F06/12 10 A Operator's seat 10 CODING
30A
F06/13 30 A Front grille headlights 10A 16
11
F06/14 15 A High beam (front grille headlights)
10A
F06/15 30 A Front grille headlights and headlights on cab 12 FRONT
frame LX1043768
10A 15A
F06/16 15 A High beam (front grille headlights and
headlights on cab frame)

OU12401,00017C1 -19-21JUL07-1/1

125-15 021412

PN=201
 Service / As Required

Fuses F07 (with Cab) F07

1 13
FRONT
Number Capacity LH
10A
(amps) Consumer 2
FRONT
RH SAE
F07/01 10 A Left low beam (front grille headlights) 10A RIGHT
3 10A
ECE
F07/02 10 A Right low beam (front grille headlights) 14
10A
F07/03 10 A Right tail light (ECE), left clearance light (ECE) 4 ECE

F07/04 10 A Left tail light (ECE), right clearance light (ECE), 10A
SAE
license plate light (ECE) 5
ROOF LEFT
FRONT 10A
F07/05 10 A Worklights on front of roof 10A
6
F07/06 - Not used
F07/07 10 A Worklights on rear of roof 7
ROOF
REAR
F07/08 10 A Rear-facing worklights on rear fenders 10A
8
FENDER
F07/09 10 A Front corner worklights 15
10A
F07/10 10 A Worklights on cab frame 9

LX1047562 —UN—30JAN09
FRONT
CORNER CODING
F07/11 10 A Headlights on cab frame (left low beam) 10A SAE
10
BELTLINE
F05/12 10 A Headlights on cab frame (right low beam) 10A
10A 16
F07/13 10 A Right tail light (SAE) 11
BELTLINE
LH
F07/14 10 A Left tail light (SAE) 10A
12 CODING
F07/15 10 A Light selection (SAE) LX1047562 BELTLINE
RH
ECE

10A 10A
F07/16 10 A Light selection (ECE)

OU12401,0001B15 -19-30JAN09-1/1

Relays K01 (with Cab) K01

Number Capacity
(amps) Designation
K01/1 20/40 Relay for power supply to electronics
amps 1

K01/2 20/40 Relay for 3-terminal socket, power outlet strip,

amps 7-terminal socket (SAE)
Relay for 3-terminal socket, power outlet strip
(ECE)
ELX

20/40A
2

POWER

LX1043776 —UN—20JUL07
OUTLET
20/40A

LX1043776

OU12401,00017C3 -19-21JUL07-1/1

125-16 021412

PN=202
 Service / As Required

Relays K02 (with Cab) K02

Number Capacity
(amps) Designation
K02/1 20/40 Relay for power supply to accessories
amps 1

K02/2 20/40 Relay for power supply to accessories

amps
ACC1

20/40A
2

LX1043777 —UN—20JUL07
ACC2

20/40A

LX1043777

OU12401,00017C4 -19-21JUL07-1/1

Relays/Diodes K03 (with Cab) K03

Number Ca-
pacity
(amps) Designation
A D
K03/A 10/20 A Relay for front corner worklights
K03/B - Not used
K03/C 1A Diode for power supply to electronics CORNER FENDER
K03/C 3 A Diode for lights 10/20A 10/20A

K03/D 10/20 A Relay for worklights on rear fenders B E

K03/E - Not used

K03/F 1 A Not used
K03/F 3 A Diode for instrument unit

LX1047560 —UN—30JAN09
C F
ELX

LX1047560
DIODE 3A/1A DIODE 3A/1A

OU12401,0001B16 -19-30JAN09-1/1

125-17 021412

PN=203
 Service / As Required

Relays K08 (with Cab) K08

Number Capacity
(amps) Designation
K08/A 10/20 Relay for worklights on front of roof A D

amps
K08/B 10/20 Relay for worklights and headlights on cab
FRONT REAR
amps frame
10/20A 10/20A
K08/C 10/20 Relay for low-beam headlights
amps B E

K08/D 10/20 Relay for worklights on rear of roof

amps
BELTLINE BELTLINE
K08/E 10/20 Relay for headlights on cab frame H3/H4 H4
amps 10/20A 10/20A

LX1043782 —UN—20JUL07
K08/F 10/20 Relay for full-beam headlights C F
amps

10/20A 10/20A

LX1043782

OU12401,00019D7 -19-22MAY08-1/1

Relays K09 (with Cab) K09

Number Capacity
(amps) Designation
K09/1 20/40 Fan relay
amps 1

K09/2 20/40 Air-conditioning system relay

amps

20/40A
2

LX1043783 —UN—24JUL07
20/40A

LX1043783

OU12401,00017C7 -19-21JUL07-1/1

125-18 021412

PN=204
 Service / As Required

Relays K10 (with Cab) K10

Number Capacity
(amps) Designation
K10/1 - Acoustic alarm
K10/2 - Plug for "come home" mode 1

ALARM
2

COME HOME
RUN

LX1043784 —UN—20JUL07
LX1043784

OU12401,00017C8 -19-21JUL07-1/1

125-19 021412

PN=205
 Service / As Required

Replace the Drive Belt

Pull the catch and lift the hood up.

LX1026131 —UN—21MAY01
OU12401,0001824 -19-26AUG07-1/4

Relieve Tension on the Drive Belt

CAUTION: Disconnect negative (—) cable

from battery.

LX1038342 —UN—18MAY06
Remove cover on tensioner roll (C). Turn tensioner roll
cap screw using a 15 mm (19/32 in.) wrench (see arrow).
Once released, the drive belt tensioner automatically goes
back to the tensioning position.
The drive belt tensioner can be kept in relieved position
as follows:
Turn tensioner roll cap screw (see arrow) until holes (A)
and (B) are aligned. Insert a 5 mm (0.2 in.) dia. pin into
the two holes that are in alignment.
For tensioning, turn tensioner roll slightly to release metal
pin and pull it from the holes. The drive belt tensioner
returns to its tensioning position automatically.

LX1027736 —UN—28AUG01
A—Hole (cam) C—Tensioner roll
B—Hole (base plate)

Continued on next page OU12401,0001824 -19-26AUG07-2/4

125-20 021412

PN=206
 Service / As Required

Replace the drive belt

Take the six screws (A) out of the fan.
Take drive belt (B) off over fan (C) and put on a new drive
belt (see below for routing of belt).

LX1034175 —UN—14JUN04
IMPORTANT: When installing, always use new
corrugated-head screws.

Tighten corrugated-head screws to the following

specification.
Specification
Attachment to
fan—Torque............................................................................22 – 28 Nm
16 – 21 lb-ft

A—Corrugated-head screws C—Fan

B—Drive belt

LX1034176 —UN—14JUN04
OU12401,0001824 -19-26AUG07-3/4

Install the drive belt according to belt routing and slacken

drive belt tensioner again.

LX1043879 —UN—18SEP07
OU12401,0001824 -19-26AUG07-4/4

125-21 021412

PN=207
 Troubleshooting
Hydraulic System
Symptom Problem Solution

Hydraulic system fails to function Not enough oil in the system Correct oil level.

Open electrical circuit Check fuses.

Hydraulic oil overheats Cooling system overloaded Dirty oil cooler. Coolant level low.

Selective control valve accidentally Move selective control valve to neutral

locked in operating position position.

Hitch fails to lift load Excessive load on hitch Reduce load.

Hitch rate-of-drop too slow Rate-of-drop not adjusted properly Adjust rate-of-drop.

Insufficient sensitivity to load System regulator in depth control or Move system regulator to load control
control mixed control position position.

Excessive sensitivity when System regulator in load control Place system regulator in depth
attaching implements position control position.

SCVs not operating Hoses not connected properly Connect hoses properly.

Remote control cylinder operates Incorrect setting for rate-of-flow Adjust flow control valve.
too fast or too slow
OULXE59,00109D6 -19-09DEC09-1/1

130-1 021412

PN=208
 Troubleshooting

Engine
Symptom Problem Solution

Engine hard to start or will not start No fuel Fill tank with proper fuel.

Air in fuel system Bleed air from fuel system

Low ambient air temperature Use cold weather starting aids.

Fuel filter contaminated Replace filter element.

Crankcase oil too heavy Use correct viscosity oil

Faulty glow plugs See your dealer.

Engine knocks Insufficient oil in engine Add more oil.

Fuel injection pump incorrectly timed See your dealer.

Engine overheats Low coolant level Fill radiator to proper level. Check
cooling system for leaks.

Loose or defective fan belt Check belt and replace, if necessary.

Cooling system needs flushing Drain, flush and refill cooling system.

Dirty oil cooler or grille screens Clean oil cooler and screens.

Defective thermostat Remove and check thermostat.

Engine oil pressure too low Low engine oil level Add more engine oil.

High oil consumption Oil of too low viscosity Drain and refill with oil of correct
viscosity.

Leakage Check for leaks in lines and around

gaskets.

Excessive fuel consumption Unsuitable fuel grade Use a suitable fuel grade.

Incorrect valve clearance See your dealer.

Fuel injection nozzles dirty or See your dealer.

damaged
Engine incorrectly timed See your dealer.

Clogged or dirty air cleaner Clean air cleaner.

Engine emits black or grey exhaust Unsuitable fuel grade Use a suitable fuel grade.
smoke
Clogged air cleaner Clean air cleaner.

Continued on next page OU12401,0001D21 -19-13JUL11-1/2

130-2 021412

PN=209
 Troubleshooting

Symptom Problem Solution

Defective muffler Replace muffler.

Fuel injection nozzles dirty or See your dealer.

damaged
Engine emits white smoke Unsuitable fuel grade Use a suitable fuel grade.

Cold engine Run engine until normal operating

temperature is reached.

Defective thermostat Replace thermostat.

Engine incorrectly timed See your dealer.

Faulty glow plugs See your dealer.

OU12401,0001D21 -19-13JUL11-2/2

Electrical System
Symptom Problem Solution

Battery will not charge Loose or corroded connections Clean and tighten battery connections.

Fault in alternator See your John Deere dealer

Sulfated battery Check specific gravity and electrolyte

level of battery.

Loose or defective alternator belt Adjust belt tension or replace belt.

Starter inoperative Loose or corroded connections Clean and tighten loose connections.

Low battery output Check and recharge battery.

Blown fuse Put in a new fuse.

Defect in starting motor See your John Deere dealer.

Starter cranks slowly Low battery output Check and recharge battery.

Crankcase oil too heavy Drain crankcase and add correct oil.

Loose or corroded connections Clean and tighten loose connections.

Defect in starting motor See your John Deere dealer.

LX,OMTRO 013415 -19-01SEP97-1/1

130-3 021412

PN=210
 Storage
Storage for a Long Period
The following storage preparations are good for long term
tractor storage up to one year. When this time is up, run
the engine until it reaches operating temperature and
operate some hydraulic functions. Afterwards re-treat
tractor for an extended storage period.

LX1038338 —UN—27APR06
IMPORTANT: Any time your tractor will not be
used for over six (6) months, the following
recommendations for storing it and removing
it from storage will help to minimize
corrosion and deterioration.

Change the engine oil and filter. Change transmission oil

and filter. Used oil will not give adequate protection.
Clean the air cleaner.
Draining and flushing of cooling system is not necessary if
engine is to be stored only for several months. However,
for extended storage periods of a year or longer, it is
recommended that the cooling system be drained, flushed
and refilled. Refill with appropriate coolant.
Fill the fuel tank.
Remove fan/alternator belt, if desired.
Remove and clean batteries. Store them in a cool, dry
place and keep them fully charged.
Clean the exterior of the tractor with salt-free water and
touch up any scratched or chipped painted surfaces with
a good quality paint.
Coat all exposed (machined) metal surfaces with grease
or corrosion inhibitor if not feasible to paint.
Seal all openings such as the vent tube and exhaust outlet.
Store the machine in a dry, protected place. If the tractor
must be stored outside, cover it with a waterproof canvas
or other suitable protective material and use a strong
waterproof tape.
Block up the tractor so that tires do not touch the ground.
Protect tires from heat and sunlight.
Tractors with air-conditioning
If tractor is equipped with an air-conditioning system,
manually turn the inner part of the pulley through several
revolutions once a month.
OU12401,0001D23 -19-16OCT09-1/1

135-1 021412

PN=211
 Storage

Removing Tractor from Storage

Remove all protective coverings. Check tire inflation and Check whether dirt or other foreign bodies have collected
remove blocks. under the hood or cab. If so, remove them.
Install battery and connect cables. Negative terminals
are grounded! CAUTION: Never operate the engine in a
closed building. Make sure there is plenty of
Check transmission and hydraulic oil level. See that ventilation. Danger of asphyxiation!
fuel tank is filled. Check coolant level in radiator. Check
crankcase oil level. Carry out 750-hour check.
OU12401,0001D22 -19-15OCT09-1/1

135-2 021412

PN=212
 Specifications
Engine (up to Model Year 2009)
Engine types
- 6230 tractor ......................................................................................................... 4045HL280
- 6330 tractor ......................................................................................................... 4045HL281
- 6430 tractor ......................................................................................................... 4045HL281

PTO power output

- 6230 tractor ......................................................................................................... 56 kW (75 hp)
- 6330 tractor ......................................................................................................... 60 kW (81 hp)
- 6430 tractor ......................................................................................................... 67 kW (90 hp)

Max. torque
- 6230 tractor at 1500 rpm ......................................................................................... 382 Nm (282 lb-ft)
- 6330 tractor at 1500 rpm ......................................................................................... 424 Nm (313 lb-ft)
- 6430 tractor at 1500 rpm ......................................................................................... 466 Nm (344 lb-ft)

Number of cylinders ................................................................................................. 4

Bore .................................................................................................................... 106.5 mm (4.19 in.)

Stroke .................................................................................................................. 127.0 mm (5.00 in.)
Displacement ......................................................................................................... 4530 cm3 (276 in3)

Firing order ............................................................................................................ 1-3-4-2

Intake valve clearance .............................................................................................. 0.36 mm (0.014 in.)

Exhaust valve clearance ........................................................................................... 0.46 mm (0.018 in.)

Slow idle ............................................................................................................... 850 rpm

Fast idle................................................................................................................ 2460 rpm

Rated engine speed ................................................................................................. 2300 rpm

Working speed range ............................................................................................... 1500 - 2300 rpm

Engine speed for PTO operation

- 540 rpm rear PTO.................................................................................................. 2124 rpm
- 540 rpm rear PTO (reversible) .................................................................................. 2143 rpm
- 1000 rpm rear PTO ................................................................................................ 2208 rpm

OU12401,0001D96 -19-10DEC09-1/1

140-1 021412

PN=213
 Specifications

Engine (from Model Year 2010)

Engine types
- 6230 tractor ......................................................................................................... 4045HL287
- 6330 tractor ......................................................................................................... 4045HL288
- 6430 tractor ......................................................................................................... 4045HL288

PTO power output

- 6230 tractor ......................................................................................................... 57 kW (76 hp)
- 6330 tractor ......................................................................................................... 63 kW (85 hp)
- 6430 tractor ......................................................................................................... 74 kW (99 hp)

Max. torque
- 6230 tractor at 1600 rpm ......................................................................................... 384 Nm (283 lb-ft)
- 6330 tractor at 1600 rpm ......................................................................................... 424 Nm (313 lb-ft)
- 6430 tractor at 1600 rpm ......................................................................................... 483 Nm (356 lb-ft)

Number of cylinders ................................................................................................. 4

Bore .................................................................................................................... 106.5 mm (4.19 in.)

Stroke .................................................................................................................. 127.0 mm (5.00 in.)
Displacement ......................................................................................................... 4530 cm3 (276 in3)

Firing order ............................................................................................................ 1-3-4-2

Intake valve clearance .............................................................................................. 0.36 mm (0.014 in.)

Exhaust valve clearance ........................................................................................... 0.46 mm (0.018 in.)

Slow idle ............................................................................................................... 850 rpm

Fast idle................................................................................................................ 2460 rpm

Rated engine speed ................................................................................................. 2300 rpm

Working speed range ............................................................................................... 1500 - 2300 rpm

Engine speed for PTO operation

- 540 rpm rear PTO.................................................................................................. 2124 rpm
- 540 rpm rear PTO (reversible) .................................................................................. 2143 rpm
- 1000 rpm rear PTO ................................................................................................ 2208 rpm

OU12401,0001D97 -19-10DEC09-1/1

140-2 021412

PN=214
 Specifications

Transmission
SyncroPlus transmission .................................................. synchronized gears, mechanically actuated
Number of gears ............................................................ 12 forward gears, 4 reverse gears

PowrReverser transmission .............................................. synchronized gears, mechanically actuated

Number of gears ............................................................ 16 forward gears, 16 reverse gears
Actuation of reverse drive lever .......................................... mechanical/hydraulic or electrical/hydraulic, under load, without operating the
clutch

PowrQuad transmission ................................................... planetary gears, hydraulically actuated

Number of gears ............................................................ 16 or 24 forward gears, 16 or 24 reverse gears
Actuation of reverse drive lever .......................................... mechanical/hydraulic, under load, without operating the clutch

PowrQuad Plus transmission ............................................ planetary gears, hydraulically actuated

Number of gears ............................................................ 16 or 24 forward gears, 16 or 24 reverse gears
Actuation of reverse drive lever .......................................... electrical/hydraulic, under load, without operating the clutch

Clutch ......................................................................... electric/hydraulic

OULXE59,001090F -19-07JUL07-1/1

Hydraulic pressure
The tractors may be fitted with one of the following
hydraulic pumps:
23 cm3 (1.4 in3), 27 cm3 (1.6 in3) or 35 cm3 (2.1 in3) pumps: ................ Load-Sensing system with fixed-displacement pump
Pump type .............................................................................. Gear pump
System pressure
- min. (stand-by): ..................................................................... 1500 kPa (15 bar; 220 psi)
- max.: ................................................................................... 20000 kPa (200 bar; 2900 psi)

Steering system ....................................................................... hydrostatic

OULXE59,0010910 -19-07JUL07-1/1

140-3 021412

PN=215
 Specifications

Loads and Weights

Maximum permissible static vertical load 6230 6330 6430
- drawbar category .......................................................... CAT 2 CAT 2 CAT 2
- on drawbar (transport), extended 250 mm (9.8 in.)
• without front-wheel drive axle ..................................... 1400 kg (3086 lb) 1400 kg (3086 lb) 1400 kg (3086 lb)
• with front-wheel drive axle ......................................... 1600 kg (3527 lb) 1600 kg (3527 lb) 1600 kg (3527 lb)
- on drawbar (field operating position)
• extended 250 mm (9.8 in.) ........................................ 2250 kg (4960 lb) 2250 kg (4960 lb) 2250 kg (4960 lb)
• extended 350 mm (13.8 in.) ...................................... 1400 kg (3086 lb) 1400 kg (3086 lb) 1400 kg (3086 lb)
• extended 400 mm (15.7 in.) ...................................... 1200 kg (2646 lb) 1200 kg (2646 lb) 1200 kg (2646 lb)
• extended 550 mm (19.7 in.) ...................................... 800 kg (1764 lb) 800 kg (1764 lb) 800 kg (1764 lb)
Maximum permissible front axle loads (without front-wheel drive axle)
- Axle with one row of holes
• in normal operation ................................................. 1600 kg (3527 lb) 1600 kg (3527 lb) 1600 kg (3527 lb)
• with front loader, up to max. 10 km/h (6 mph) and with tread
width of 1.80 m (71 in.) .............................................. 3800 kg (8378 lb) 3800 kg (8378 lb) 3800 kg (8378 lb)
- Axle with two rows of holes
• in normal operation ................................................. 2050 kg (4519 lb) 2050 kg (4519 lb) 2050 kg (4519 lb)
• with front loader, up to max. 10 km/h (6 mph) and with tread
width of 1.80 m (71 in.) .............................................. 5000 kg (11023 lb) 5000 kg (11023 lb) 5000 kg (11023 lb)
Maximum permissible front axle load (with front-wheel drive axle)
- normal operation up to 40 km/h (25 mph) ............................ 3700 kg (8157 lb) 4000 kg (8818 lb) 4200 kg (9259 lb)
- with front loader, up to max. 10 km/h (6 mph) and with tread
width of 1.80 m (71 in.) .................................................... 5500 kg (12125 lb) 5800 kg (12787 lb) 5800 kg (12787 lb)
Maximum permissible rear axle loads ............................... 5600 kg (12346 lb) 6500 kg (14330 lb) 6500 kg (14330 lb)
Maximum permissible total weight ................................... 7600 kg (16755 lb) 8200 kg (18078 lb) 8200 kg (18078 lb)

NOTE: Traffic regulations in certain countries may restrict

the permissible axle loads and total weight to
figures lower than those quoted above.
OU12401,000182F -19-15NOV11-1/1

Towed Mass
Depending on how the trailer/implement is braked, the
following masses and speeds are permitted:
Trailer/implement brake system Maximum permissible towed mass Top speed
- unbraked .............................................................. 3000 kg (6615 lb) 25 km/h (15.5 mph)
- independent .......................................................... 4000 kg (8820 lb) 25 km/h (15.5 mph)
- overrun brake ........................................................ 8000 kg (17635 lb) 25 km/h (15.5 mph)
- hydraulic brake ...................................................... 34000 kg (74955 lb) 25 km/h (15.5 mph)
- single-line air brake ................................................. 34000 kg (74955 lb) 25 km/h (15.5 mph)
- dual-line air brake ................................................... 34000 kg (74955 lb) Maximum design speed

There may be legal limits in force that restrict the

maximum towed mass and/or travel speeds to figures
lower than those quoted here.
OULXE59,00106A1 -19-30SEP04-1/1

140-4 021412

PN=216
 Specifications

Electrical System
Battery .................................................................................. 12 V, 110 Ah or 12 V, 154 Ah

Alternator with overvoltage protection ............................................ 14 V, 115 A

Starter motor ........................................................................... 12 V, 3.0 kW (4.0 hp)

Battery terminal grounded .......................................................... negative

OU12401,000149E -19-29JUN06-1/1

Capacities
Fuel tank................................................................................................ 116 L (30.6 U.S.gal.), 165 L (43.6 U.S.gal.) or 185 L (48.9
U.S.gal.)

Cooling system
- without cab ........................................................................................... 26.5 L (7.0 U.S.gal)
- with cab ............................................................................................... 29.0 L (7.7 U.S.gal.)

Crankcase with filter.................................................................................. 16 L (4.2 U.S.gal.)

Transmission/hydraulic system
- SyncroPlus transmission with 12/4 gears ...................................................... 52 L (13.7 U.S.gal.)
- PowrReverser transmission with 16/16 gears................................................. 52 L (13.7 U.S.gal.)
- PowrQuad transmission with 16/16 gears ..................................................... 49 L (12.9 U.S.gal.)
- PowrQuad transmission with 24/24 gears ..................................................... 50 L (13.2 U.S.gal.)
- PowrQuad Plus transmission with 16/16 or 24/24 gears ................................... 50 L (13.2 U.S.gal.)
- extra with creeper transmission .................................................................. 1 L (0.3 U.S.gal.)
- extra with front-wheel drive ....................................................................... 3 L (0.8 U.S.gal.)

Front-wheel drive
- axle housing.......................................................................................... 6.5 L (1.7 U.S.gal.)
- final drives ............................................................................................ 0.9 L (0.25 U.S.gal.)

OULXE59,0010985 -19-23SEP10-1/1

140-5 PN=217
021412
 Specifications

Permissible Front Axle Load in Relation to Tires (Normal Operation)

On leaving the factory, tractors may be equipped with Permissible axle load (without front-wheel drive) at 30
the following tires on the front wheels: km/h (18.5 mph):
Permissible axle load on axles with one row of holes is
1600 kg (3525 lb).
Tires SRI* Normal operation
9.5L-15 8 PR ............................................. 365 mm (14.4 in.) 1700 kg (3745 lb)
11L-15 8 PR ............................................. 390 mm (15.4 in.) 2120 kg (4670 lb)
27/9.5-15 6 PR ............................................. 330 mm (13.0 in.) 1618 kg (3565 lb)
10.00-16 10 PR ............................................ 425 mm (16.7 in.) 2650 kg (5840 lb)
11L-16 8 PR ............................................. 390 mm (15.4 in.) 2000 kg (4410 lb)
11L-16 12 PR ............................................ 390 mm (15.4 in.) 2500 kg (5510 lb)
7.50-18 8 PR ............................................. 410 mm (16.1 in.) 1890 kg (4165 lb)
7.50-20 8 PR ............................................. 425 mm (16.7 in.) 2040 kg (4500 lb)

Permissible axle load (with front-wheel drive) at 40 km/h

(25 mph):
Tires SRI* 6230 tractors 6330 tractors 6430 tractors

9.5-16 112A8.................... 390 mm (15.4 in.) 2240 kg (4935 lb) 2240 kg (4935 lb) 2240 kg (4935 lb)
10.5/80-18 10 PR .................... 425 mm (16.7 in.) 2480 kg (5465 lb) 2480 kg (5465 lb) 2480 kg (5465 lb)
11.2R24 114A8.................... 525 mm (20.7 in.) 2360 kg (5200 lb) 2360 kg (5200 lb) 2360 kg (5200 lb)
12.4R24 119A8.................... 550 mm (21.7 in.) 2720 kg (5995 lb) 2720 kg (5995 lb) 2720 kg (5995 lb)
13.6-24 10 PR .................... 575 mm (22.6 in.) 3700 kg (8155 lb) 4000 kg (8815 lb) 4200 kg (9260 lb)
13.6R24 121A8 ................... 575 mm (22.6 in.) 2900 kg (6395 lb) 2900 kg (6395 lb) 2900 kg (6395 lb)
128A8 ................... 575 mm (22.6 in.) 3600 kg (7935 lb) 3600 kg (7935 lb) 3600 kg (7935 lb)
14.9R24 126A8 ................... 600 mm (23.6 in.) 3400 kg (7495 lb) 3400 kg (7495 lb) 3400 kg (7495 lb)
12.4R28 121A8 ................... 600 mm (23.6 in.) 2900 kg (6395 lb) 2900 kg (6395 lb) 2900 kg (6395 lb)
13.6R28 123A8 ................... 625 mm (24.6 in.) 3100 kg (6835 lb) 3100 kg (6835 lb) 3100 kg (6835 lb)
13.6-38 6 PR ..................... 775 mm (30.5 in.) 3000 kg (6615 lb) 3000 kg (6615 lb) 3000 kg (6615 lb)
280/70R16 112A8.................... 390 mm (15.4 in.) 2240 kg (4935 lb) 2240 kg (4935 lb) 2240 kg (4935 lb)
280/85R24 115A8.................... 525 mm (20.7 in.) 2430 kg (5355 lb) 2430 kg (5355 lb) 2430 kg (5355 lb)
320/85R24 122A8 ................... 550 mm (21.7 in.) 3000 kg (6615 lb) 3000 kg (6615 lb) 3000 kg (6615 lb)
340/85R24 125A8 ................... 575 mm (22.6 in.) 3300 kg (7275 lb) 3300 kg (7275 lb) 3300 kg (7275 lb)
340/85R24 130A8 ................... 575 mm (22.6 in.) 3700 kg (8155 lb) 3800 kg (8375 lb) 3800 kg (8375 lb)
380/70R24 125A8 ................... 575 mm (22.6 in.) 3300 kg (7275 lb) 3300 kg (7275 lb) 3300 kg (7275 lb)
380/85R24 131A8 ................... 600 mm (23.6 in.) 3700 kg (8155 lb) 3900 kg (8595 lb) 3900 kg (8595 lb)
420/70R24 130A8 ................... 600 mm (23.6 in.) 3700 kg (8155 lb) 3800 kg (8375 lb) 3800 kg (8375 lb)
320/85R28 124A8 ................... 600 mm (23.6 in.) 3200 kg (7055 lb) 3200 kg (7055 lb) 3200 kg (7055 lb)
340/85R28 127A8 ................... 625 mm (24.6 in.) 3500 kg (7715 lb) 3500 kg (7715 lb) 3500 kg (7715 lb)
* Speed/radius index

OULXE59,0010977 -19-28NOV08-1/1

140-6 021412

PN=218
 Specifications

Permissible Front Axle Load in Relation to Tires (Operation with Front Loader)
The values quoted here apply only for travel speeds up to Permissible axle load (without front-wheel drive):
8 km/h (5 mph). Max. permissible front tread width with
front loader is 1.80 m (71 in.).
On leaving the factory, tractors may be equipped with
the following tires:
Tires SRI* Front loader operation
9.5L-15 8 PR ............................................. 365 mm (14.4 in.) 3400 kg (7495 lb)
11L-15 8 PR ............................................. 390 mm (15.4 in.) 4240 kg (9345 lb)
27/9.5-15 6 PR ............................................. 330 mm (13.0 in.) 3236 kg (7135 lb)
10.00-16 10 PR ............................................ 425 mm (16.7 in.) 5300 kg (11685 lb)
11L-16 8 PR ............................................. 390 mm (15.4 in.) 4000 kg (8815 lb)
11L-16 12 PR ............................................ 390 mm (15.4 in.) 5000 kg (11020 lb)
7.50-18 8 PR ............................................. 410 mm (16.1 in.) 3780 kg (8330 lb)
7.50-20 8 PR ............................................. 425 mm (16.7 in.) 4080 kg (8995 lb)

Permissible axle load (with front-wheel drive):

Tires SRI* 6230 tractors 6330 and 6430 tractors

9.5-16 112A8 .......................... 390 mm (15.4 in.) 3140 kg (6920 lb) 3140 kg (6920 lb)
10.5/80-18 10 PR .......................... 425 mm (16.7 in.) 3720 kg (8200 lb) 3720 kg (8200 lb)
11.2R24 114A8 .......................... 525 mm (20.7 in.) 3540 kg (7805 lb) 3540 kg (7805 lb)
12.4R24 119A8 .......................... 550 mm (21.7 in.) 4080 kg (8995 lb) 4080 kg (8995 lb)
13.6-24 10 PR .......................... 575 mm (22.6 in.) 5500 kg (12125 lb) 5800 kg (12785 lb)
13.6R24 121A8 ......................... 575 mm (22.6 in.) 4350 kg (9590 lb) 4350 kg (9590 lb)
128A8 ......................... 575 mm (22.6 in.) 5400 kg (11905 lb) 5400 kg (11905 lb)
14.9R24 126A8 ......................... 600 mm (23.6 in.) 5100 kg (11240 lb) 5100 kg (11240 lb)
12.4R28 121A8 ......................... 600 mm (23.6 in.) 4350 kg (9590 lb) 4350 kg (9590 lb)
13.6R28 123A8 ......................... 625 mm (24.6 in.) 4650 kg (10250 lb) 4650 kg (10250 lb)
13.6-38 6 PR ........................... 775 mm (30.5 in.) 4200 kg (9260 lb) 4200 kg (9260 lb)
280/70R16 112A8 .......................... 390 mm (15.4 in.) 3140 kg (6920 lb) 3140 kg (6920 lb)
280/85R24 115A8 .......................... 525 mm (20.7 in.) 3650 kg (8045 lb) 3650 kg (8045 lb)
320/85R24 122A8 ......................... 550 mm (21.7 in.) 4500 kg (9920 lb) 4500 kg (9920 lb)
340/85R24 125A8 ......................... 575 mm (22.6 in.) 4950 kg (10910 lb) 4950 kg (10910 lb)
130A8 ......................... 575 mm (22.6 in.) 5500 kg (12125 lb) 5700 kg (12565 lb)
380/70R24 125A8 ......................... 575 mm (22.6 in.) 4950 kg (10910 lb) 4950 kg (10910 lb)
380/85R24 131A8 ......................... 600 mm (23.6 in.) 5500 kg (12125 lb) 5800 kg (12785 lb)
420/70R24 130A8 ......................... 600 mm (23.6 in.) 5500 kg (12125 lb) 5700 kg (12565 lb)
320/85R28 124A8 ......................... 600 mm (23.6 in.) 4800 kg (10580 lb) 4800 kg (10580 lb)
340/85R28 127A8 ......................... 625 mm (24.6 in.) 5250 kg (11575 lb) 5250 kg (11575 lb)
* Speed/radius index

OULXE59,0010978 -19-28NOV08-1/1

140-7 021412

PN=219
 Specifications

Permissible Rear Axle Load in Relation to Tires

The values quoted here apply only for travel speeds up Permissible rear axle load:
to 40 km/h (25 mph).
On leaving the factory, tractors may be equipped with
the following tires:
Tires SRI* 6230 tractors 6330 and 6430 tractors

21.5L-16.1 6PR ............................ 525 mm (20.7 in.) 2500 kg (5510 lb) 2500 kg (5510 lb)
16.9R24 134A8 .......................... 625 mm (24.6 in.) 4240 kg (9345 lb) 4240 kg (9345 lb)
16.9-24 6PR ............................ 625 mm (24.6 in.) 3100 kg (6835 lb) 3100 kg (6835 lb)
18.4R26 140A8 .......................... 675 mm (26.6 in.) 5000 kg (11025 lb) 5000 kg (11025 lb)
18.4-26 6PR ............................ 675 mm (26.6 in.) 3600 kg (7935 lb) 3600 kg (7935 lb)
16.9R30 137A8 .......................... 700 mm (27.6 in.) 4600 kg (10140 lb) 4600 kg (10140 lb)
18.4R30 142A8 .......................... 725 mm (28.5 in.) 5300 kg (11685 lb) 5300 kg (11685 lb)
16.9R34 139A8 .......................... 750 mm (29.5 in.) 4860 kg (10715 lb) 4860 kg (10715 lb)
16.9-34 10PR ........................... 730 mm (28.7 in.) 5600 kg (12350 lb) 6500 kg (14330 lb)
18.4R34 144A8 .......................... 775 mm (30.5 in.) 5600 kg (12350 lb) 5600 kg (12350 lb)
13.6R38 128A8 .......................... 750 mm (29.5 in.) 3860 kg (8510 lb) 3860 kg (8510 lb)
14.9R38 133A8 .......................... 775 mm (30.5 in.) 4120 kg (9080 lb) 4120 kg (9080 lb)
16.9R38 141A8 .......................... 800 mm (31.5 in.) 5150 kg (11350 lb) 5150 kg (11350 lb)
18.4R38 146A8 .......................... 825 mm (32.5 in.) 5600 kg (12350 lb) 6000 kg (13225 lb)
13.6-46 6 PR ............................ 875 mm (34.4 in.) 3300 kg (7275 lb) 3300 kg (7275 lb)
420/85R24 137A8 .......................... 625 mm (24.6 in.) 4940 kg (10890 lb) 4940 kg (10890 lb)
460/85R26 143A8 .......................... 675 mm (26.6 in.) 5450 kg (12015 lb) 5450 kg (12015 lb)
420/85R30 140A8 .......................... 700 mm (27.6 in.) 5000 kg (11025 lb) 5000 kg (11025 lb)
460/85R30 145A8 .......................... 725 mm (28.5 in.) 5600 kg (12350 lb) 5800 kg (12785 lb)
420/85R34 142A8 .......................... 750 mm (29.5 in.) 5300 kg (11685 lb) 5300 kg (11685 lb)
460/85R34 147A8 .......................... 775 mm (30.5 in.) 5600 kg (12350 lb) 6150 kg (13560 lb)
480/70R34 143A8 .......................... 750 mm (29.5 in.) 5450 kg (12015 lb) 5450 kg (12015 lb)
520/70R34 148A8 .......................... 775 mm (30.5 in.) 5600 kg (12350 lb) 6300 kg (13890 lb)
340/85R38 133A8 .......................... 750 mm (29.5 in.) 4120 kg (9080 lb) 4120 kg (9080 lb)
420/85R38 144A8 .......................... 800 mm (31.5 in.) 5600 kg (12350 lb) 5600 kg (12350 lb)
460/85R38 149A8 .......................... 825 mm (32.5 in.) 5600 kg (12350 lb) 6500 kg (14330 lb)
480/70R38 145A8 .......................... 800 mm (31.5 in.) 5600 kg (12350 lb) 5800 kg (12785 lb)
520/70R38 150A8 .......................... 825 mm (32.5 in.) 5600 kg (12350 lb) 6500 kg (14330 lb)
600/65R38 153A8 .......................... 825 mm (32.5 in.) 5600 kg (12350 lb) 6500 kg (14330 lb)
320/90R42 139A8 .......................... 800 mm (31.5 in.) 4860 kg (10715 lb) 4860 kg (10715 lb)

* Speed/radius index

OULXE59,0010979 -19-28NOV08-1/1

140-8 021412

PN=220
 Specifications

Unified Inch Bolt and Screw Torque Values

TS1671 —UN—01MAY03

Bolt or Screw SAE Grade 1 SAE Grade 2a SAE Grade 5, 5.1 or 5.2 SAE Grade 8 or 8.2
Size Lubricatedb Dryc Lubricatedb Dryc Lubricatedb Dryc Lubricatedb Dryc
Nm lb.-in. Nm lb.-in. Nm lb.-in. Nm lb.-in. Nm lb.-in. Nm lb.-in. Nm lb.-in. Nm lb.-in.
1/4 3.7 33 4.7 42 6 53 7.5 66 9.5 84 12 106 13.5 120 17 150
Nm lb.-ft. Nm lb.-ft.
5/16 7.7 68 9.8 86 12 106 15.5 137 19.5 172 25 221 28 20.5 35 26
Nm lb.-ft. Nm lb.-ft.
3/8 13.5 120 17.5 155 22 194 27 240 35 26 44 32.5 49 36 63 46
Nm lb.-ft. Nm lb.-ft. Nm lb.-ft.
7/16 22 194 28 20.5 35 26 44 32.5 56 41 70 52 80 59 100 74
Nm lb.-ft.
1/2 34 25 42 31 53 39 67 49 85 63 110 80 120 88 155 115
9/16 48 35.5 60 45 76 56 95 70 125 92 155 115 175 130 220 165
5/8 67 49 85 63 105 77 135 100 170 125 215 160 240 175 305 225
3/4 120 88 150 110 190 140 240 175 300 220 380 280 425 315 540 400
7/8 190 140 240 175 190 140 240 175 490 360 615 455 690 510 870 640
1 285 210 360 265 285 210 360 265 730 540 920 680 1030 760 1300 960
1-1/8 400 300 510 375 400 300 510 375 910 670 1150 850 1450 1075 1850 1350
1-1/4 570 420 725 535 570 420 725 535 1280 945 1630 1200 2050 1500 2600 1920
1-3/8 750 550 950 700 750 550 950 700 1700 1250 2140 1580 2700 2000 3400 2500
1-1/2 990 730 1250 930 990 730 1250 930 2250 1650 2850 2100 3600 2650 4550 3350
Torque values listed are for general use only, based on the strength of the bolt Replace fasteners with the same or higher grade. If higher
or screw. DO NOT use these values if a different torque value or tightening grade fasteners are used, tighten these to the strength of the
procedure is given for a specific application. For plastic insert or crimped steel original. Make sure fastener threads are clean and that you
type lock nuts, for stainless steel fasteners, or for nuts on U-bolts, see the properly start thread engagement. When possible, lubricate
tightening instructions for the specific application. Shear bolts are designed to fail plain or zinc plated fasteners other than lock nuts, wheel bolts
under predetermined loads. Always replace shear bolts with identical grade. or wheel nuts, unless different instructions are given for the
specific application.
a
Grade 2 applies for hex cap screws (not hex bolts) up to 6 in. (152 mm) long. Grade 1 applies for hex cap screws over 6
in. (152 mm) long, and for all other types of bolts and screws of any length.
b
“Lubricated” means coated with a lubricant such as engine oil, fasteners with phosphate and oil coatings, or 7/8 in.
and larger fasteners with JDM F13C, F13F or F13J zinc flake coating.
c
“Dry” means plain or zinc plated without any lubrication, or 1/4 to 3/4 in. fasteners with JDM F13B, F13E or F13H zinc flake coating.
DX,TORQ1 -19-12JAN11-1/1

140-9 PN=221
021412
 Specifications

Metric Bolt and Screw Torque Values

TS1670 —UN—01MAY03

4.8 8.8 9.8 10.9 12.9 12.9

4.8 8.8 9.8 10.9 12.9 12.9

Bolt or Screw Class 4.8 Class 8.8 or 9.8 Class 10.9 Class 12.9
Size Lubricateda Dryb Lubricateda Dryb Lubricateda Dryb Lubricateda Dryb
Nm lb.-in. Nm lb.-in. Nm lb.-in. Nm lb.-in. Nm lb.-in. Nm lb.-in. Nm lb.-in. Nm lb.-in.
M6 4.7 42 6 53 8.9 79 11.3 100 13 115 16.5 146 15.5 137 19.5 172
Nm lb.-ft. Nm lb.-ft. Nm lb.-ft. Nm lb.-ft.
M8 11.5 102 14.5 128 22 194 27.5 243 32 23.5 40 29.5 37 27.5 47 35
Nm lb.-ft. Nm lb.-ft. Nm lb.-ft.
M10 23 204 29 21 43 32 55 40 63 46 80 59 75 55 95 70
Nm lb.-ft.
M12 40 29.5 50 37 75 55 95 70 110 80 140 105 130 95 165 120
M14 63 46 80 59 120 88 150 110 175 130 220 165 205 150 260 190
M16 100 74 125 92 190 140 240 175 275 200 350 255 320 235 400 300
M18 135 100 170 125 265 195 330 245 375 275 475 350 440 325 560 410
M20 190 140 245 180 375 275 475 350 530 390 675 500 625 460 790 580
M22 265 195 330 245 510 375 650 480 725 535 920 680 850 625 1080 800
M24 330 245 425 315 650 480 820 600 920 680 1150 850 1080 800 1350 1000
M27 490 360 625 460 950 700 1200 885 1350 1000 1700 1250 1580 1160 2000 1475
M30 660 490 850 625 1290 950 1630 1200 1850 1350 2300 1700 2140 1580 2700 2000
M33 900 665 1150 850 1750 1300 2200 1625 2500 1850 3150 2325 2900 2150 3700 2730
M36 1150 850 1450 1075 2250 1650 2850 2100 3200 2350 4050 3000 3750 2770 4750 3500
Torque values listed are for general use only, based on the strength of Shear bolts are designed to fail under predetermined loads. Always
the bolt or screw. DO NOT use these values if a different torque value or replace shear bolts with identical property class. Replace fasteners with
tightening procedure is given for a specific application. For stainless steel the same or higher property class. If higher property class fasteners are
fasteners or for nuts on U-bolts, see the tightening instructions for the used, tighten these to the strength of the original. Make sure fastener
specific application. Tighten plastic insert or crimped steel type lock nuts threads are clean and that you properly start thread engagement. When
by turning the nut to the dry torque shown in the chart, unless different possible, lubricate plain or zinc plated fasteners other than lock nuts,
instructions are given for the specific application. wheel bolts or wheel nuts, unless different instructions are given for the
specific application.
a
“Lubricated” means coated with a lubricant such as engine oil, fasteners with phosphate and oil coatings, or M20
and larger fasteners with JDM F13C, F13F or F13J zinc flake coating.
b
“Dry” means plain or zinc plated without any lubrication, or M6 to M18 fasteners with JDM F13B, F13E or F13H zinc flake coating.
DX,TORQ2 -19-12JAN11-1/1

140-10 PN=222
021412
 Specifications

Limited Battery Warranty

NOTE: Applicable in North America only. For complete
Limitation of Implied Warranties and
machine warranty, reference a copy of the John
Purchaser’s Remedies
Deere warranty statement. Contact your John
Deere dealer to obtain a copy. To the extent permitted by law, neither John Deere
nor any company affiliated with it makes any
To Secure Warranty Service warranties, representations or promises as to the
quality, performance or freedom from defect of
The purchaser must request warranty service from a John
the products covered by this warranty. IMPLIED
Deere dealer authorized to sell John Deere batteries, and
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
present the battery to the dealer with the top cover plate
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TO THE EXTENT
codes intact.
APPLICABLE, SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION
Free Replacement TO THE APPLICABLE ADJUSTMENT PERIOD
SET FORTH HERE. THE PURCHASER’S ONLY
Any new battery which becomes unserviceable (not REMEDIES IN CONNECTION WITH THE BREACH
merely discharged) due to defects in material or OR PERFORMANCE OF ANY WARRANTY ON JOHN
workmanship within 90 days of purchase will be replaced DEERE BATTERIES ARE THOSE SET FORTH HERE. IN
free of charge. Installation costs will be covered by NO EVENT WILL THE DEALER, JOHN DEERE OR ANY
warranty if (1) the unserviceable battery was installed by COMPANY AFFILIATED WITH JOHN DEERE BE LIABLE
a John Deere factory or dealer, (2) failure occurs within FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
90 days of purchase, and (3) the replacement battery is (Note: Some states do not allow limitations on how long
installed by a John Deere dealer. an implied warranty lasts or the exclusion or limitation of
incidental or consequential damages. So these limitations
Pro Rata Adjustment and exclusions may not apply to you.) This warranty gives
Any new battery which becomes unserviceable (not you specific legal rights, and you may also have some
merely discharged) due to defects in material or rights which vary from state to state.
workmanship more than 90 days after purchase, but No Dealer Warranty
before the expiration of the applicable adjustment period,
will be replaced upon payment of the battery’s current list The selling dealer makes no warranty of it’s own and the
price less a pro rata credit for unused months of service. dealer has no authority to make any representation or
The applicable adjustment period is determined from the promise on behalf of John Deere, or to modify the terms
Warranty Code printed at the top of the battery and chart or limitations of this warranty in any way.
below. Installation costs are not covered by warranty after
90 days from the date of purchase. Pro Rata Months of Adjustment
Warranty Code Warranty Period
This Warranty Does Not Cover
A 40 Months
Breakage of the container, cover, or terminals. B 36 Months
Depreciation or damage caused by lack of reasonable C 24 Months
and necessary maintenance or by improper maintenance.
NOTE: If your battery is not labeled with a warranty code,
Transportation, mailing, or service call charges for it is a warranty code "B".
warranty service.
DX,BATWAR,NA -19-16APR92-1/1

140-11 021412

PN=223
 Serial Numbers
Type Plates NOTE: Copy the letters and figures in the boxes provided.
The illustrations below show some of the type plates used
on the tractor. The letters and numbers on the plates are
necessary for ordering spare parts, among other things.
OU12401,00013A7 -19-05MAR06-1/1

Product Identification Number

The plate bearing the product identification number is
located on the right side of the main frame. The tractor is
provided with one of two possible product identification
numbers. Select the appropriate box.

LX1049746 —UN—06MAY10
Product identification number (13-digit)
* *

Product identification number (17-digit)

* *

OULXBER,00018E7 -19-07MAY10-1/1

Engine Serial Number

The engine serial number plate is located on the
right-hand side of engine block.
NOTE: Besides the engine serial number, the plate

LX1041060 —UN—30JUN06
shows the engine type as well. When ordering
spare parts for the engine, please quote all the
numbers and letters on this type plate.
* *

OU12401,0001491 -19-29JUN06-1/1

Transmission Serial Number

The transmission serial number plate is located on the
right-hand side of differential housing. It provides details
of the gear pair in the differential (e.g. 53/10) and the
transmission ratio of the front-wheel drive axle (e.g.
LX000554 —UN—09AUG94

1,712). This information will be required if the type of tires

is to be changed.
* *

OU12401,0001492 -19-29JUN06-1/1

145-1 021412

PN=224
 Serial Numbers

Front-Wheel Drive Axle Serial Number

The plate bearing the front-wheel drive axle serial number
is located on the end of the axle, at the rear. Information
provided on it includes the transmission ratio of the front
axle. This information will be required if the type of tires

LX1031717 —UN—09JUL03
used at the front is to be changed.
* *

OU12401,0000E4D -19-01JUL03-1/1

Serial Number of Operator's Cab

The serial number of the operator's cab is located below
the cab door.
* *

LX1041061 —UN—30JUN06
OU12401,0001490 -19-29JUN06-1/1

Keep Proof of Ownership

1. Maintain in a secure location an up-to-date inventory
of all product and component serial numbers.
2. Regularly verify that identification plates have not
been removed. Report any evidence of tampering to
law enforcement agencies and order duplicate plates.

TS1680 —UN—09DEC03
3. Other steps you can take:
- Mark your machine with your own numbering system
- Take color photographs from several angles of each
machine

DX,SECURE1 -19-18NOV03-1/1

145-2 021412

PN=225
 Serial Numbers

Keep Machines Secure

1. Install vandal-proof devices.
2. When machine is in storage:
- Lower equipment to the ground
- Set wheels to widest position to make loading more
difficult

TS230 —UN—24MAY89
- Remove any keys and batteries
3. When parking indoors, put large equipment in front of
exits and lock your storage buildings.
4. When parking outdoors, store in a well-lighted and
fenced area.
5. Make note of suspicious activity and report any thefts
immediately to law enforcement agencies.
6. Notify your John Deere dealer of any losses.
DX,SECURE2 -19-18NOV03-1/1

145-3 021412

PN=226
 Lubrication and Maintenance Records
Every 250 Hours

L112122 —UN—05SEP94
Drain residue from fuel tank. Check oil level of Lubricate three-point hitch. Lubricate pivoting fenders.
transmission/hydraulic system. Clean battery and check Check neutral start circuit. Tighten wheel retaining bolts.
electrolyte level. Lubricate the front axle. Lubricate Check brakes. Tighten the screws on the front loader
front-wheel drive axle/drive shafts and check oil level. bracket. Check components of swinging drawbar for wear.
OU12401,0001825 -19-26AUG07-1/1

Every 500 Hours

L112123 —UN—05SEP94
Drain and refill engine crankcase. Replace engine check electrolyte level. Lubricate the front axle. Lubricate
crankcase filter element. Replace fuel filter. Lubricate front-wheel drive axle/drive shafts and check oil level.
rear axle bearings. Check air intake hoses. Check engine Lubricate three-point hitch. Lubricate pivoting fenders.
ground connection. Check cab ground connection. Check Check neutral start circuit. Tighten wheel retaining bolts.
engine drive belt. Drain residue from fuel tank. Check oil Check brakes. Tighten the screws on the front loader
level of transmission/hydraulic system. Clean battery and bracket. Check components of swinging drawbar for wear.
OU12401,0001826 -19-26AUG07-1/1

150-1 021412

PN=227
 Lubrication and Maintenance Records

Every 750 Hours

L112124 —UN—05SEP94
Replace transmission/hydraulic oil filter elements. Lubricate three-point hitch. Lubricate pivoting fenders.
Drain residue from fuel tank. Check oil level of Check neutral start circuit. Tighten wheel retaining bolts.
transmission/hydraulic system. Clean battery and check Check brakes. Tighten the screws on the front loader
electrolyte level. Lubricate the front axle. Lubricate bracket. Check components of swinging drawbar for wear.
front-wheel drive axle/drive shafts and check oil level.
OU12401,0001827 -19-26AUG07-1/1

Every 1000 Hours

L112123 —UN—05SEP94
Have viscous fan drive checked by your John Deere check electrolyte level. Lubricate the front axle. Lubricate
dealer. Drain and refill engine crankcase. Replace engine front-wheel drive axle/drive shafts and check oil level.
crankcase filter element. Replace fuel filter. Lubricate Lubricate three-point hitch. Lubricate pivoting fenders.
rear axle bearings. Check air intake hoses. Check engine Check neutral start circuit. Tighten wheel retaining bolts.
ground connection. Check cab ground connection. Check Check brakes. Tighten the screws on the front loader
engine drive belt. Drain residue from fuel tank. Check oil bracket. Check components of swinging drawbar for wear.
level of transmission/hydraulic system. Clean battery and
OU12401,0001828 -19-26AUG07-1/1

150-2 021412

PN=228
 Lubrication and Maintenance Records

Every 1500 Hours

L112126 —UN—05SEP94
Drain and refill the front-wheel drive axle. Drain and refill Check engine drive belt. Drain residue from fuel tank.
the transmission/hydraulic system and clean the intake Clean battery and check electrolyte level. Lubricate the
screen. Replace transmission/hydraulic oil filter elements. front axle. Lubricate front-wheel drive axle/driveshafts.
Replace engine air cleaner filter element and cab air Lubricate three-point hitch. Lubricate pivoting fenders.
filters. Drain and refill engine crankcase. Replace engine Check neutral start circuit. Tighten wheel retaining bolts.
crankcase filter element. Replace fuel filter. Lubricate Check brakes. Tighten the screws on the front loader
rear axle bearings. Check air intake hoses. Check bracket. Check components of swinging drawbar for wear.
engine ground connection. Check cab ground connection.
OU12401,0001829 -19-26AUG07-1/1

Every 2000 Hours

L112126 —UN—05SEP94
Have valve clearance, glow plug resistance and viscous of transmission/hydraulic system. Clean battery and
fan drive checked by your John Deere dealer. Drain check electrolyte level. Lubricate the front axle. Lubricate
and refill engine crankcase. Replace engine crankcase front-wheel drive axle/drive shafts and check oil level.
filter element. Replace fuel filter. Lubricate rear axle Lubricate three-point hitch. Lubricate pivoting fenders.
bearings. Check air intake hoses. Check engine ground Check neutral start circuit. Tighten wheel retaining bolts.
connection. Check cab ground connection. Check engine Check brakes. Tighten the screws on the front loader
drive belt. Drain residue from fuel tank. Check oil level bracket. Check components of swinging drawbar for wear.
OU12401,000182A -19-26AUG07-1/1

150-3 021412

PN=229
 Lubrication and Maintenance Records

Every 6000 Hours

L112126 —UN—05SEP94
Have valve clearance, glow plug resistance and viscous Clean battery and check electrolyte level. Lubricate the
fan drive checked by your John Deere dealer. Drain, front axle. Lubricate front-wheel drive axle/drive shafts.
flush out and refill the cooling system*. Drain and Lubricate three-point hitch. Lubricate pivoting fenders.
refill the front-wheel drive axle. Drain and refill the Check neutral start circuit. Tighten wheel retaining bolts.
transmission/hydraulic system and clean the intake Check brakes. Tighten the screws on the front loader
screen. Change the transmission/hydraulic oil filter. bracket. Check components of swinging drawbar for wear.
Change engine air cleaner element and cab air filters.
Drain and refill engine crankcase. Replace engine
crankcase filter element. Replace fuel filter. Lubricate *If COOL-GARD II is used, perform this service after no
rear axle bearings. Check air intake hoses. Check more than 6000 hours or every 6 years.
engine ground connection. Check cab ground connection.
Check engine drive belt. Drain residue from fuel tank.
OU12401,000182B -19-12DEC11-1/1

150-4 021412

PN=230
 Index
Page Page

A Drain Intervals for Diesel Engine Coolant

Diesel Engine Coolant, Drain Intervals ................. 80-10
Access to fuses .......................................................... 85-3 Drawbar ...................................................................... 70-8
Additional headlights .................................................. 20-3 Checking for wear ................................................... 95-9
Adjust Steering Wheel .............................................. 25-10 Drive belt ................................................................ 125-20
Adjust toe-in................................................................ 65-6
Air Conditioning System ............................................. 25-9 E
Air intake hoses, checking........................................ 100-2
Alternator .................................................................... 85-6 Engine ........................................................... 140-1, 140-2
Attachment controls.................................................... 15-2 Engine oil
Break-In .................................................................. 80-4
B Engine oil filter element, changing............................ 100-1
Engine oil level ........................................................... 90-1
Ballast......................................................................... 60-1 Engine oil, change .................................................... 100-1
Battery Engine, shutting off..................................................... 40-5
Warranty ..............................................................140-11 Engine, starting........................................................... 40-2
Battery electrolyte, checking level of .......................... 95-2
Battery Handling, Safety F
Safety, Battery Handling ....................................... 05-14
Battery, access to ....................................................... 85-3 Fan and Air Louvers ................................................... 25-8
Bolt and screw torque values Front axle with FWD, lubrication................................. 95-3
Metric .................................................................. 140-10 Front axle without FWD, lubrication............................ 95-2
Unified inch ........................................................... 140-9 Front axle, adjusting ................................................... 65-1
Brakes, foot .............................................................. 45-14 Front Loader Brackets ...............................................70-11
Break-in engine oil...................................................... 80-4 Front Loader Installation............................................70-11
Break-in period ........................................................... 30-1 Front wheel tread adjustment (tractors with
front wheel drive) ...................................................... 65-7
C Front wheel tread adjustment, reversible rims............ 65-7
Front-wheel drive...................................................... 45-13
Cab air filters, service ............................................... 125-2 Front-wheel drive axle
Capacities................................................................. 140-5 Oil............................................................................ 80-7
Center link ................................................................ 50-10 Fuel
Changing Diesel ............................................................. 80-1, 80-3
Engine oil .............................................................. 100-1 Handling and storing ............................................... 80-2
Engine oil filter ...................................................... 100-1 Lubricity................................................................... 80-1
Check transmission oil level ....................................... 95-1 System .................................................................... 40-1
Checking brake operation........................................... 95-4 Fuel filter.......................................................... 90-1, 125-5
Cold-weather starting aids.......................................... 40-2 Fuel filters, changing ................................................ 100-2
Controls and instruments............................................ 15-1 Fuel preheater ............................................................ 40-3
Coolant
Additional information ............................................80-11 G
Diesel engine .......................................................... 80-9
John Deere Cool-Gard II Coolant Extender .......... 80-10 Grease........................................................................ 80-8
Testing................................................................... 80-12
Warm temperature climates.................................. 80-10 H
Coolant preheater....................................................... 40-3
Coolant, changing..................................................... 120-2 Hardware torque values
CoolScan .................................................................. 80-13 Metric .................................................................. 140-10
Correct tire pressures ............................................... 65-18 Unified inch ........................................................... 140-9
Couplers ..................................................................... 70-5 Hardware update ........................................................ 15-5
Creeper transmission, engaging............................... 45-13 Hazard warning lights ................................................. 20-5
Heating System .......................................................... 25-8
D Hitch control................................................................ 50-1
Hood, opening ............................................................ 85-2
Diesel fuel.......................................................... 80-1, 80-3
Differential lock ......................................................... 45-14
Draft links, telescopic.................................................. 50-7

Continued on next page

Index-1 021412

PN=1
 Index

Page Page

PTO options................................................................ 55-1

I PTO speeds................................................................ 55-2
PTO, operating instructions ........................................ 55-1
Implement, leveling................................................... 50-10 PTO-driven equipment ............................................... 55-4

J Q
Jack Up the Tractor .................................................... 85-4 Quick-coupling (hook-type) draft links ........................ 50-7

L R
Lift links..................................................................... 50-12 Rear axle, lubricating................................................ 100-2
Lifting Points for Jacking Up ....................................... 85-4 Reduce Fuel Consumption ......................................... 45-1
Lights, checks on........................................................ 90-2 Replace Transmission/Hydraulic Oil Filter................ 105-1
Lubricant Roll-Over Protective Structure (ROPS) ...................... 25-1
Mixing...................................................................... 80-8
Lubricant Storage S
Storage, Lubricant................................................... 80-9
Lubricants, Safety Safety, Avoid High-Pressure Fluids
Safety, Lubricants ................................................... 80-8 Avoid High-Pressure Fluids .................................. 05-20
Lubrication and maintenance records ...................... 150-1 Safety, Fire Prevention
Lubricity of diesel fuel ................................................. 80-1 Fire Prevention........................................................ 05-3
Safety, Forestry Operations
M Limited Use in Forestry Operation .......................... 05-8
Safety, Handle Fuel Safely, Avoid Fires
Maximum permissible oil withdrawal .......................... 70-6 Avoid Fires, Handle Fuel Safely.............................. 05-3
Measuring rear wheel slip........................................... 60-1 Safety, ROPS
Metric bolt and screw torque values ....................... 140-10 ROPS, Keep Installed Propertly.............................. 05-4
MFWD axle, change oil .............................................115-1 Safety, Steps and Handholds
MFWD axle, check oil level ........................................ 95-3 Use Steps and Handholds Correctly....................... 05-5
Mixing lubricants......................................................... 80-8 Safety, Tightening Wheel Retaining
Monitor installation.....................................................25-11 Bolts/Nuts
Multi-function lever Tightening Wheel Retaining Bolts/Nuts ................ 05-20
Mechanical, with front-loader dampening ............... 70-4 Safety, Transport at Safe Speeds
Transport Towed Equipment at Safe Speeds ....... 05-10
N Safety, Use Caution on Slopes and Uneven
Terrain
Neutral start circuit, check .......................................... 95-5 Use Caution on Slopes and Uneven Terrain..........05-11
Seat Belt ..................................................................... 25-1
O Seats .......................................................................... 25-3
Selective control valves .............................................. 70-1
Oil Control levers, mechanical...................................... 70-2
Front-wheel drive axle............................................. 80-7 Serial numbers ......................................................... 145-1
Oil filters...................................................................... 80-9 Service intervals ......................................................... 85-1
Oil for front-wheel drive axle....................................... 80-7 Signal socket ............................................................ 25-12
Oil withdrawal with hydraulic motor ............................ 70-6 Software update ......................................................... 15-5
Oilscan...................................................................... 80-13 Speed, selecting correct travel speed ........................ 45-3
Stabilizing system..................................................... 50-14
P Starter motor............................................................. 125-6
Storage ..................................................................... 135-1
Parking the tractor ...................................................... 40-4 Storage, removing tractor from................................. 135-2
Power outlet socket, three-terminal .......................... 25-12 Storing fuel ................................................................. 80-2
PowrQuad transmission ............................................45-11 Sway blocks.............................................................. 50-13
Pressure in tires, general.......................................... 65-17 Swinging drawbar adjustment .................................... 70-8
Pressure-free return circuit ......................................... 70-7
PTO and creeper controls .......................................... 15-2 T
PTO guard .................................................................. 55-1
PTO operation ............................................................ 55-2 Three-point hitch......................................................... 50-6

Continued on next page

Index-2 021412

PN=2
 Index

Page

Three-point hitch, lubrication of .................................. 95-4

Tire pressure ............................................................ 65-18
Tire pressures, general............................................. 65-17
Toe-in checks (tractors without front-wheel drive) ...... 65-5
Toe-in, adjusting ......................................................... 65-6
Torque charts
Metric .................................................................. 140-10
Unified inch ........................................................... 140-9
Towed equipment, transport at safe speeds............. 05-10
Towing the tractor ....................................................... 40-4
Transmission/hydraulic oil, changing.........................115-2
Travel speeds, PowrQuad transmission..................... 45-8
Tread adjustment, adjustable rims ............................. 65-8
Troubleshooting........................................................ 130-1
Turn signal lights and horn ......................................... 20-6

U
Unified inch bolt and screw torque values ................ 140-9
Update,
Hardware or software.............................................. 15-5

W
Wheel nuts, tightening ................................................ 65-9
Wipers ........................................................................ 25-7
Worklight switches...................................................... 20-1

Index-3 021412

PN=3
 Index

Index-4 021412

PN=4
 John Deere Service Keeps You on the Job
John Deere Parts
We help minimize downtime by putting genuine John
Deere parts in your hands in a hurry.
That’s why we maintain a large and varied inventory—to
stay a jump ahead of your needs.

TS100 —UN—23AUG88
DX,IBC,A -19-04JUN90-1/1

The Right Tools

Precision tools and testing equipment enable our Service
Department to locate and correct troubles quickly . . . to
save you time and money.

TS101 —UN—23AUG88
DX,IBC,B -19-04JUN90-1/1

Well-Trained Technicians
School is never out for John Deere service technicians.
Training schools are held regularly to be sure our
personnel know your equipment and how to maintain it.
Result?

TS102 —UN—23AUG88
Experience you can count on!

DX,IBC,C -19-04JUN90-1/1

Prompt Service
Our goal is to provide prompt, efficient care when you
want it and where you want it.
We can make repairs at your place or at ours, depending
on the circumstances: see us, depend on us.
TS103 —UN—23AUG88

JOHN DEERE SERVICE SUPERIORITY: We'll be around

when you need us.

DX,IBC,D -19-04JUN90-1/1

021412
IBC-1 PN=235
John Deere Service Keeps You on the Job

021412
IBC-2 PN=236
John Deere Service Keeps You on the Job

021412
IBC-3 PN=237